Quarterlytics / Grocery Stores / McColl's Retail Group plc

McColl's Retail Group plc

mcls · LSE
Claim this profile
Ticker mcls
Exchange LSE
Sector
Industry Grocery Stores
Employees 5001-10,000
← All annual reports
FY2017 Annual Report · McColl's Retail Group plc
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
focus

McColl’s Retail Group plc
Annual Report and Accounts 2017

Your neighbourhood’s favourite shop

With 1,611 stores across the UK we’re  
a pretty big business these days, but  
no two are the same. With our flexible  
model we are focused on bringing the  
best product offer, and convenient services, 
to all the local communities we serve,  
so we can achieve our vision to be  
your neighbourhood’s favourite shop.

McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

Warm
Friendly

and

When we ask our customers what they like best 
about McColl’s, they tell us it’s our warm and 
friendly colleagues. More often than not our 
colleagues live locally and they’re on first name 
terms with many of our customers. They are a 
driving force in our journey to becoming your 
neighbourhood’s favourite shop.

1

2  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

and

Little
Often

Being at the heart of neighbourhoods, 
with long opening hours, means we’re a 
convenient choice for lots of our customers. 
They’re buying more and more from us so 
we are continuing to grow our convenience 
offer to make sure they can get everything 
they need from their local McColl’s.

£5.62

Average basket size 

31%

of customers shop  
with us every day

60%

of customers live or 
work within 400m of 
their local McColl’s

3

Fresh
Tasty

and

+120%

Increase in fruit &  
vegetable sales

+40%

Increase in 
food-to-go sales

450+

In-store bakeries

With essential food and groceries, fresh fruit 
and vegetables, ready meals and freshly 
prepared food-to-go, our stores cater 
for a wide range of customer needs and 
shopping missions. Demand for fresh food 
continues to grow, and with an exciting new 
supply partnership, we’re looking forward 
to developing our range to meet evolving 
customer needs, and bringing the best of 
British produce to McColl’s. 

4  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

5

Range
Services

and

We think of ourselves as a neighbourhood hub 
– providing great products and useful services, 
close to where people live, and available 
when they need them. From Post Offices that 
are open late to Amazon lockers and Collect+ 
points, plus bill payment services, home news 
delivery, cash machines and national lottery 
terminals, we’ve got it covered.

6am-
10pm

We are open when 
customers need us 

588

Post Offices

4 in 10

Visits to McColl’s 
involve a service

6  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

7

8  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

Caring
and
Compassionate

We’ve been serving local neighbourhoods 
for over a hundred years, and know just how 
much people value having a shop nearby 
that provides a friendly welcome as well as 
access to fresh food and essential services. 
We also know how important it is to support 
communities around our stores. This year 
we’ve helped around 500 local organisations 
and good causes through the ‘Making a 
Difference Locally’ programme.

Our generous customers and colleagues 
also helped to raise money to support  
St George’s Hospital’s research into sudden 
cardiac death in young people, and in 2017 
we presented them with a cheque  
for £300,000. 

500

local organisations and 
good causes supported

9

Contents

Where to find things in this year’s report 

12  Chairman’s statement

14 

At a glance

16  Market overview

21  Chief Executive’s review

30  Our business model

37  McColl’s and responsibility

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

2017 highlights 
11 
12  Chairman’s statement
At a glance
14 
16  Market overview
20  Our vision and strategy
21  Chief Executive’s review
24  A formula for growth
30  Our business model
32  Our performance KPIs
Financial review
33 
Social and environmental review
37 
Principal risks and uncertainties
44 

10  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

48  Chairman’s governance statement
49  Compliance with the UK Corporate 

Governance Code
Board of Directors
Retail Board

50 
52 
54  Corporate governance report
60  Nomination Committee report
63  Audit & Risk Committee report
68 
71 
78 
86  Directors’ report
91 

Remuneration report
Directors’ remuneration policy
Annual report on remuneration

Statement of Directors’ responsibilities

92 

 Independent Auditor’s report to the 
members of McColl’s Retail Group plc 

99  Consolidated income statement
 Consolidated statement of 
99 
comprehensive income

100  Consolidated statement of financial position
101  Consolidated statement of changes in equity
101  Consolidated statement of cash flows 
102  Notes to the financial statements
130  Company statement of financial position
130  Consolidated statement of changes 

in equity

131  Notes to the Company financial statements
135  Glossary of terms
IBC  Contacts, addresses and 

shareholder information

2017 highlights

A formula for growth

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

A transformational acquisition
In 2017 we completed the transformational 
acquisition of 298 quality convenience stores from 
the Co-op, integrating all of the stores over the 
course of seven months. They are driving a step-
change in sales and profit growth in the business, 
and are a great addition to the Group.

Our groundbreaking  
new supply partnership
Our new long-term partnership with Morrisons will 
provide McColl’s with a best-in-class fresh food 
and grocery offer through the Safeway brand. 
It will also simplify our operations as we move  
to a single wholesale supply partner.

Driving organic growth
This year we completed the second stage of 
our convenience store refresh trial that involves 
redesigning and relaying our older convenience 
stores. The results have been very encouraging 
and our refresh programme provides a great 
opportunity to drive organic growth  
in the business.

Read more 
Page 24

Read more 
Page 26

Read more 
Page 28

Revenue*

£1.13bn

+19.1% 2016

Adjusted EBITDA*

£44.0m

+20.0% 2016

Adjusted earnings per share*

Capital expenditure excluding the acquisition*

 18.3p

+14.3% 2016

Profit before tax

£18.4m

+4.2% 2016

£20.3m

-21.0% 2016

* See glossary of terms on pages 135-136 for definition

Full details of adjusted EBITDA can be found in note 6 on page 110.

11

Chairman’s statement

Shaping the 
future

It has been another year of transformation for 
McColl’s and the business continues to go from 
strength to strength. With a clear vision and 
strategy, never has the business had so many 
opportunities to drive growth.

“ I’m pleased to report 
that the business has 
continued to make 
excellent progress.”

12  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Having joined the Board of McColl’s in April 2016, 
I was delighted to succeed James Lancaster 
as Chairman in April 2017. It’s been a very busy 
and exciting year for the business and I’m 
pleased to report that it has continued to make 
excellent progress. 

Jonathan and his management team have done 
an outstanding job, delivering an excellent set of 
results, whilst simultaneously securing deals which 
provide the platform for sustainable future growth. 

The 298 acquired stores were successfully integrated 
and are driving significant growth in the business. 
The benefits of this acquisition will continue to be 
realised and these valuable stores will provide 
further opportunities for growth as they become an 
established part of the estate.

The business made another important strategic 
step in August with the announcement of a 
groundbreaking supply partnership with Morrisons. 
This decision, at a time when the convenience 
sector is rapidly evolving and experiencing a period 
of consolidation, aligns McColl’s with a strong 
partner. It will allow us to provide a significantly 
enhanced fresh offer for customers through the 
launch of the Safeway brand, and access to better 
commercial terms whilst simplifying operations 
through sole supply. 

Alongside this the team has continued to identify 
opportunities to invest in growing the business and, 
with the development of the convenience store 
refresh trial, it has demonstrated the potential to 
drive growth in large parts of the more established 
estate. The early results of the trial are encouraging, 
even before we’ve seen the benefits of our 
new supply partnership. We are confident that 
investment in our store estate, coupled with a much 

stronger fresh and chilled range, will provide  
a strong platform for the future.

Developing the Board
After a rigorous and extensive search I was pleased 
to welcome Jens Hofma to the Board in July as 
an Independent Non-Executive Director. Jens is 
currently Chief Executive of Pizza Hut Restaurants 
in the UK and brings a wealth of knowledge 
and experience of the food industry. His focus 
on developing teams and improving customer 
experiences make him a great addition to 
the Board.

James Lancaster, founder of the business, stepped 
down from his role as Non-Executive Director in 
October 2017. I’d like to thank him for his enormous 
contribution to McColl’s over the years. Under his 
direction and guidance, McColl’s grew into one 
of the largest neighbourhood retailers in the UK. 
I’d also like to thank James for all the support and 
advice he gave me during my first few months 
as Chairman.

In addition I’d like to thank Sharon Brown and 
Georgina Harvey for their continued support and 
hard work as Chairs of the Audit & Risk Committee 
and Remuneration Committee respectively.

Increasing returns to shareholders
The business continues to generate strong cash 
returns which we use to fund the capital investment 
required to deliver sustainable growth in revenue 
and profit, alongside dividend payments to 
shareholders and reducing debt.

The Board is recommending a final dividend of 
6.9 pence per share, making a total dividend for 
the period of 10.3 pence, up slightly year-on-year 

as part of our commitment to increase returns to 
shareholders. This dividend will be paid on 1 June 
2018, to shareholders on the register at the close of 
business on 20 April 2018, subject to approval at the 
forthcoming Annual General Meeting.

Looking forward with confidence
Jonathan and the team have another busy year 
ahead as they transition around 1,300 stores to new 
supply arrangements. Whilst this will involve some 
inevitable disruption it will position McColl’s as a 
strong, credible fresh food retailer that can serve the 
needs of a growing customer base.

McColl’s will also continue to pursue other 
opportunities to grow the business, both through 
our acquisition programme and the next phase of 
the convenience store refresh initiative. I have every 
confidence that 2018 will represent another year of 
continued financial progress, and one which we will 
exit strongly placed for 2019 and beyond.

Angus Porter
Chairman

13

At a glance

Our vision is to be 
your neighbourhood’s 
favourite shop

Through our network of 1,611 
neighbourhood stores, over 22,000  
dedicated colleagues serve five million 
customers every week.

Our goals:
1.  Growing convenience offer
2.  Excellent customer service
3.  Increase neighbourhood presence

Our values
We want McColl’s to be a great place to shop 
and work, and how we behave is important. 
Our values help guide us and make better 
informed decisions every day. 

Who we are
McColl’s is a leading neighbourhood retailer, with 
an estate of 1,611 managed convenience stores 
and newsagents. We operate 1,279 McColl’s 
branded convenience stores as well as 332 
newsagents branded Martin’s across the UK, 
except in Scotland where we operate under  
our heritage brand, RS McColl.

22,000+

colleagues with shared values:

 1,611

stores

Customer  
first

Simple and 
consistent

2011

47%

Convenience

2017

5
8
8

1,263

stores 

5
7
6

Caring and 
compassionate

Community 
champions

3

3

2

79%

Convenience 

1,611

stores

1

,

2

7

9 

14  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

Convenience stores 

Newsagents

 
 
Where we are
We serve communities right across the UK. 
Our sites are chosen carefully and most of 
our stores are close to residential areas, in 
neighbourhoods and villages, where customers 
really value all that our stores offer.

What we offer
We know that every community is different and 
that’s why we tailor our offer to meet the needs 
of local neighbourhoods, offering a wide range 
of products and useful services. Our colleagues 
are friendly and helpful making sure that our 
customers receive a warm welcome at McColl’s.

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

 Five million

customer visits a week

Scotland

178 37

North 
West

219 33

North 
East

74 11

Yorkshire  
and Humber

123 14

Customer focus
Warm and Friendly 
Our warm and friendly colleagues 
provide excellent customer service 
and are a driving force in our journey 
to becoming your neighbourhood’s 
favourite shop.

Local
Little and Often
Being at the heart of neighbourhoods 
means we’re a convenient choice  
for lots of our customers.

Products
Fresh and Tasty 
With essential food and groceries, fresh 
fruit and vegetables, ready meals and 
freshly prepared food-to-go, we cater 
for a wide variety of customer needs 
and missions.

East 
Midlands

73 18

West 
Midlands

62 31

East 
of England

124 80

Number of stores

0 – 100  

101 – 200  

200+

Wales

48

5

Convenience stores  

Newsagents

South 
West

174 26

South 
East

London

13 12

191 65

Everyday services
Range and Convenience 
We think of ourselves as a 
neighbourhood hub – providing 
great products and useful services, 
close to where people live, and 
available when they need them.

Communities
Caring and Compassionate 
We know just how much people value 
having a shop nearby and how important 
it is to support communities around 
our stores. 

s  

t
c
u
d
o

r

P

o c a l 

L

E

v

s

e

e

r

r

y

v

i

d

c

a

e

y

s

s
e

m uniti

Customer  
needs

C

ustomer  
focus

m

C o

See our business model 
Page 30

15

Market overview

Convenient
routes to 

Shoppers continue to favour convenience stores and  
it’s been a year of unprecedented change for the channel.  
In particular we have seen increased activity and competition 
within the wholesale supply market for convenience stores. 
Amidst this competitive environment, we have aligned 
ourselves with a new supply partner, ensuring we are well 
positioned to maximise the growth opportunities that  
the convenience channel offers. 

16  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

The grocery sector 
remains competitive

The grocery sector has remained competitive 
as customers continue to have access to a 
multitude of retail brands and channels, and 
cost pressures have continued.

In January 2017 the UK saw the return of food price 
inflation for the first time in over two years, as many 
retailers had to pass on some degree of input cost 
increases. We were able to mitigate some of this 
pressure through negotiations with suppliers on the 
basis of our enlarged estate.

Consumer confidence fell throughout the latter part 
of the year as concerns over Brexit re-emerged, and 
in November we saw the first rise in interest rates in 
over a decade. Although this impacts much of the 
retail sector, the convenience channel generally 
performs relatively well in this environment because 
people tend to shop more frequently and locally, 
buying fewer items per shop as a way of managing 
their budget.

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

 1

Changing lifestyles favour 
convenience shopping
Long-term trends are changing the way we live and 
shop, which in turn is shaping the grocery industry. 
Longer average life expectancy, more single person 
households, more dual-income households, lengthy 
commutes, a greater emphasis on leisure time and 
changes in technology are all impacting the way 
we shop. 

Although people aren’t generally working longer 
hours, more of us are in employment and feeling 
more time-pressured. We’re spending a significant 
proportion of our time shopping for food and 
groceries – on average people spend almost  
17 hours each month, the equivalent of a whole 
waking day.1

Shoppers want to save time, and locations of store 
and speed of shop are two of the most important 
reasons for people to choose convenience stores.

This trend for convenience is most evident amongst 
younger shoppers with one in five post millennials 
(18-25 year olds) claiming to do the majority of their 
food and grocery shopping in convenience stores.2

 2

The convenience channel  
is growing faster than the  
grocery sector 
The overall grocery sector is forecast to grow by 15% 
in the next five years.

The convenience channel is expected to outstrip 
this as it is predicted to benefit from changes in 
lifestyle and shopping behaviour. It is forecast to 
grow by 18% or £7.1bn to £47.1bn in 2022, at which 
point it is expected to remain larger than the online 
and discounter channels combined.

1 

IGD/McColl’s research 2017

2 

IGD research 2017

£86.0bn

£91.1bn

Growth in channels of the UK grocery sector

2017

2022

2017

2022

2017

2022

2017

2022

£40.0bn

£47.1bn

£20.1bn

£30.1bn

£16.2bn

£16.3bn

2017

£10.4bn

2022

£16.0bn

2017

£11.8bn

2022

£12.2bn

Supermarkets

Convenience

Discounters* 

Hypermarkets

Online

Other retailers**

*  ‘Discounters’ includes all sales of Aldi and Lidl, and grocery-only sales of principal 

variety discounters, including Wilkinson

**  ‘Other retailers’ includes specialist food and drink retailers, CTNs (confectionery, 

tobacco and news), food sales from mainly non-food retailers and street markets

Source: IGD 2017

17

Market overview continued

3

Convenience multiples are 
consolidating the channel and 
driving growth
There are around 50,000 convenience stores in the 
UK. The market is made up of a number of different 
players, with true independents and symbol groups 
still accounting for almost 75% of stores.

All the major grocery retailers are seeking growth in 
the convenience channel, with the number of stores 
operated by the multiples increasing by over 40% in 
the last five years. Whilst they currently only make up 
less than 10% of convenience stores, they account 
for over 20% of convenience store sales. 

We are the second largest multiple convenience 
store operator in the UK, with 1,279 convenience 
stores. The majority of our stores are in 
neighbourhood locations and we typically 

Number of UK convenience stores

49,918

Unaffiliated independents – 38%

Symbol groups – 31%

Convenience forecourts – 17%

Convenience multiples – 9%

Co-operatives – 5%

Source: WRBM/Nielsen 2017

18  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

Our mix of sales also continues to evolve. With our 
heritage as a newsagent chain, we over-index 
in declining traditional categories such as 
confectionery, news and tobacco. However, 
our product mix is strengthening as we grow our 
convenience offer and focus on higher growth, 
higher margin categories including food-to-go and 
fresh foods.

compete with independents and symbol 
group operators, rather than the major multiple 
convenience retailers who tend to favour larger, 
higher footfall locations. There is opportunity for 
further consolidation as we look to increase our 
neighbourhood presence through acquisition.

Opportunities for new greenfield or brownfield 
convenience sites, as favoured by the major 
grocery retailers, are reducing and many retailers 
are looking for growth through franchising or 
wholesale supply models. In 2017 we saw the 
proposed merger of Tesco and Booker, and 
acquisition of Nisa by the Co-op. We have signed 
a new long-term supply partnership with Morrisons 
that will give us a best-in-class fresh offer through the 
Safeway brand and positions us well in a channel 
that continues to provide excellent opportunities 
for growth.

4

Shoppers are spending more on 
chilled foods in convenience stores
Shoppers use convenience stores to buy a wide 
range of products and around 40% of all food 
and grocery shopping trips are now conducted 
in convenience stores. The frequency of top-
up shopping is increasing and fresh food is a 
fundamental part of top-up baskets.

In 2017 chilled food was the biggest sales category 
for the second year running, whilst sales in tobacco, 
confectionery and news, continue to decline. 

With fewer planned shopping trips, food-to-go 
and meal solutions are growing in popularity. 
They currently represent only a small proportion 
of convenience store sales, but are rapidly 
growing categories.

Sales contribution by category

Chilled foods

Tobacco and E-cigarettes

Alcohol

Canned and packaged grocery
7.3%

Fruit and vegetables

Soft drinks

Confectionery

6.4%

5.9%

5.3%

Non-food

Milk

4.0%

3.6%

News and magazines

Household

3.5%

3.5%

Hot food-to-go

0.4%

Others

Source: IGD 2017

17.2%

15.0%

14.3%

13.6%

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

 5

Convenience stores play  
an important role in local  
communities
Convenience stores used to be considered a 
distress purchase destination, but the role of 
the neighbourhood shop continues to evolve. 
Convenience stores are no longer just a 
place to buy a few extra items or emergency 
essentials. They fulfil a wide range of shopper 
missions at different times of the day – from hot 
breakfast items to take away, to ingredients for 
an evening meal, and online parcel collection 
on the way home from work.

Services are an increasingly popular and 
important part of the convenience store offer with 
one in four shoppers using a service such as bill 
payment or cash machine at the same time as 
shopping for food and groceries. This rises to four 
in ten shopping trips at McColl’s.

Services provide a good reason to visit 
convenience stores and support traditional 
footfall drivers such as news and tobacco that 
are in structural decline. At McColl’s we have 
a market leading services proposition which 
is profitable in its own right and we believe 
this is fundamental to providing excellent 
customer service.

96%

Satisfaction with services on 
last convenience store visit

% of most recent visits using services

42%

25%

27%

Any services

National lottery

PayPoint

4%

Cashpoint
4%

11%

12%

10%

Parcel pick-up/return

8%

1%

Post Office

4%

3%

Mobile top-up

2%

Café/restaurant

1%

Takeaway e.g. Subway

1%

McColl’s

Convenience

Source: IGD/McColl’s research 2017

19

Our vision and strategy

Our clear strategy for growth has given us the 
framework for another year of excellent progress

Our three strategic goals are clear and are 
underpinned by strong business plans aligned to 
our five key building blocks – brand, customer, 
stores, colleagues and offer.

Every year we comprehensively review our strategy 
with our executive management (our Retail Board) 
and with our Board. This helps us review progress 
against our plans, address any learnings and 
evolving circumstances, and identify ways to 
maximise opportunities in the years ahead.

Vision

Goals

Key building  
blocks

Values

Your  
neighbourhood’s 
favourite shop

1.
Growing 
convenience 
offer

2.
Excellent 
customer  
service

3.
Increase 
neighbourhood 
presence

Brand

Offer

Customer

Stores

Colleagues

1

Growing  
convenience offer 
Working with our 
carefully selected supply 
partners we offer an 
ever-greater range of 
products and services to 
meet the evolving needs 
of neighbourhoods 
across the UK.

2 3

Excellent customer 
service 
Understanding customers 
and doing everything 
that we can to meet 
their everyday needs 
is at our core. We strive 
to build loyalty and 
strengthen our reputation 
in the neighbourhoods 
we serve, by providing 
a warm and friendly 
welcome along with 
a host of services that 
make the lives of our 
customers easier.

Increase 
neighbourhood 
presence 
We will grow our 
neighbourhood 
presence by 
strengthening our brand 
and acquiring new 
stores. The convenience 
market remains highly 
fragmented with 
plenty of opportunities 
for acquisition and 
consolidation.

Customer 
first

Simple and 
consistent

Caring and  
compassionate

Community 
champions

20  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

Chief Executive’s review

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

A bigger, stronger 
McColl’s

This has been my 27th year in the business and my 
first full year as Chief Executive. I am immensely 
proud of what we have achieved and I believe the 
business is in the best place it’s ever been. I can’t 
recall a year when we have experienced more 
change in the grocery sector and never has there 
been a more exciting time to be in convenience.

It’s been a year of significant change for McColl’s. 
We are a bigger and stronger business today than 
at any time in our long history. We have a far larger 
and better quality estate and our product mix has 
continued to strengthen.

For the first time the business has achieved annual 
revenues of more than £1bn, demonstrating that we 
are a business of significant scale.

In the last few years we have been growing 
principally through acquisition, consolidating a part 
of the grocery sector that remains dominated by 
independent retailers. We have long held the view 
that there would be consolidation in the wholesale 
supply market for convenience stores too. This has 
proved to be the case with the major grocery 
retailers looking to take advantage of the growing 
convenience channel. The merger of Tesco and 
Booker and the Co-op’s agreement to acquire Nisa 
have changed the broader competitive landscape. 
With a sector in flux we’ve ensured that McColl’s 
is well placed to succeed and further capitalise 

on the opportunities presented by the growing 
convenience channel. 

Our recent acquisition of almost 300 convenience 
stores was important in terms of giving us greater 
scale, and we had always planned to leverage 
this by retendering our distribution in the first half 
of 2017. The timing of our tender process meant 
that we were able to benefit from the increased 
competition for wholesale supply in the market. 
We wanted to achieve three things through this 
process: improve our customer offer; access better 
commercial terms, on the basis of our enhanced 
scale; and simplify our operations by moving to 
a single wholesale supply partner. On all of these 
measures Morrisons was the clear choice for us 
and we are delighted to have formed a long-term 
partnership that will see them supply our stores with 
branded products, and an ‘own-label’ through the 
launch of Safeway in 2018. 

We were both sad and disappointed to learn 
that Palmer and Harvey (P&H) was placed into 

21

Chief Executive’s review continued

administration on 28 November 2017. We had 
worked in partnership with P&H for over two 
decades and are grateful for all their support over 
the years. Our priority has been to ensure that, 
despite the inevitable disruption to stores previously 
supplied by P&H, any impact on customers is 
minimised. With the support of our partners we 
have largely ensured continuity of supply and have 
closely managed distribution to these stores.

Defining McColl’s for customers and colleagues
The McColl’s name has a long and rich history. 
We have evolved from a vending business, to 
a national chain of newsagents, to a leading 
neighbourhood convenience retailer. We have 
undergone a significant transformation and it’s 
important that we are clear about who we are, 

Proportion of grocery and alcohol sales

 32%

2016: 27% 

“ I am confident and 
excited about our 
future.”

22  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

and the kind of business we want to be. We’ve 
talked to lots of customers and colleagues to 
understand how the business is perceived, and our 
strengths and opportunities. Our vision is to be your 
neighbourhood’s favourite shop, and we are clearer 
than ever on what that means to our customers, 
and how we can help them understand what they 
can expect from McColl’s. This work will support the 
rollout of Safeway at McColl’s and help establish our 
fresh food credentials in the minds of customers.

Just as it’s important for customers to understand 
how McColl’s is changing, it’s essential that our 
colleagues are behind our vision so that we are 
all pulling in the same direction. We’ve been 
working on embedding our company values with 
colleagues across the business. That means we 
always put customers first, and we keep things 
simple and consistent so that as we grow we don’t 
introduce unnecessary complexity to the business. 
We are caring and compassionate and we are 
community champions, recognising that we have 
a wider responsibility to the communities we serve.

Increase neighbourhood presence
In 2017 we acquired 298 quality convenience stores 
from the Co-op. I’m delighted that all of the stores 
transitioned to McColl’s on time and on budget. 
It’s been an extraordinary team effort involving 
colleagues from every part of the business and I’m 
very proud of the way everyone worked together.

We were delighted to welcome over 3,000 new 
colleagues to McColl’s. They have done a fantastic 
job helping customers through the transition. 
The feedback from customers has been positive  
on a wide range of metrics.

With all the acquired stores on board by July they 
have driven a step-change in our sales and profit 
performance in the second half of the year. There is 
more potential for these stores, as we undertake 
further work to optimise the ranges and introduce 
our market-leading services proposition to more of 
the estate.

With the acquired stores all transitioned, we 
resumed our single store acquisition programme 
buying a further 12 convenience stores during the 
year, and we will look to acquire around 20 new 
stores in 2018. We also sold or closed a number 
of stores, predominantly newsagents, as part of 
our planned disposal of underperforming stores, 
ending the year with 1,279 convenience stores 
and 332 newsagents.

Growing convenience offer
We have continued to evolve our offer to meet 
the needs of customers and reduce our reliance 
on traditional categories, such as tobacco, news 
and confectionery, that are in long term structural 
decline. Our grocery and alcohol sales have grown 
by over 70% in the last three years as we become 
more of a food-led business, representing excellent 
progress towards our target for this to be our biggest 
sales category.

This growth has been accelerated by the recently 
acquired stores that have a greater proportion of 
grocery and alcohol sales. In the early part of the 
year we worked closely with our suppliers to develop 
a wider range of fresh and chilled products for these 
stores so that we could help transition customers to 
the McColl’s offer.

We’ve learnt a lot through this process and 
there is potential for us to replicate some of this 
range development elsewhere in the estate. 
Our experience of developing fresh food ranges 
has also been valuable in our preparations for the 
launch of Safeway in 2018.

Our store refresh programme has also given us 
an opportunity to develop our range and grow 
our convenience offer. We completed our first 
two pilot stores towards the end of 2016 and in 
the second half of 2017 we refurbished a further 
25 stores. They have been completely refreshed 
in terms of the design and layout, providing more 
space for fresh and chilled foods, and food-to-go. 
We’ve also introduced new ranges such as healthy 
snacks, a free from range and craft ales. The early 
performance of these stores is very encouraging 

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

and we believe there is a significant opportunity to 
drive organic growth in the estate by rolling out this 
programme over the next few years. In 2018 we plan 
to complete a further 100 store refreshes.

Food-to-go, whilst currently still a small proportion of 
our overall sales, is an increasingly important part of 
our convenience offer. In 2017 our food-to-go sales 
grew by over 40% and we extended our successful 
partnership with Subway, opening six new franchises 
in the year.

The greatest opportunity we have to grow our 
convenience offer is through our groundbreaking 
new supply partnership. We’re really excited to 
be working with a partner who is not only a very 
experienced grocery retailer, but also the UK’s 
second largest fresh food manufacturer. 

We have initially launched around 400 Safeway 
products into McColl’s stores as part of a phased 
rollout that began in January 2018. These are 
a combination of ambient grocery and fresh 
food lines, sourced from Morrisons’ farms and 
fisheries, and prepared in Morrisons-owned 
manufacturing sites.

As we rollout Safeway this will enable us to provide 
an enhanced offer for McColl’s customers and there 
will be further opportunity to grow and develop the 
range over time.

Excellent customer service
Excellent customer service starts with an 
understanding of what customers need and want. 
Our store colleagues do a fantastic job of getting to 
know their customers and, because most of them 
live nearby, our stores feel very much like the hub of 
a local community. Our role extends beyond that of 
a traditional neighbourhood shop and we continue 
to develop our services offer to meet the needs 
of our customers. We know that four in ten visits to 
McColl’s involve a service of some kind, whether 
that be using one of our 588 Post Offices, visiting one 
of our ATMs, or using one of our fast-growing internet 
parcel collection points.

We’re investing in more bespoke customer research 
to help us understand our customer needs and 
we’ve worked with a number of expert insight 
partners this year. Our Plus loyalty card remains 
one of our best tools for understanding customer 
behaviour and it’s growing in popularity. Over 10% of 
transactions in the newly acquired stores are made 
with a Plus card, giving us valuable insight into what 
sort of products and offers appeal to customers in 
those stores. 

Putting customers first is our absolute priority and 
I’m delighted to have appointed Tim Fairs as our first 
ever Customer Director. He joined the management 
team in January 2018 from Clintons, where he 
was VP Marketing and E-Commerce, leading the 
transformation of the customer offer and customer 
experience programme. He brings extensive 
experience in both the retail and non-retail sectors, 
and prior to his six years with Clintons, he was Head 
of Marketing for Dixons Carphone for over four years. 

Looking ahead
In the next few months we will significantly enhance 
our offer when we begin to transition supply in over 
1,300 stores and rollout Safeway at McColl’s. We will 
improve the quality of our estate and bring a great 
shopping experience to more customers through 
our refresh programme. We’ll also continue to grow 
through our successful acquisition programme. 
2018 is set to be another busy year for McColl’s  
and I am confident and excited about our future.

Jonathan Miller
Chief Executive

Revenue 

£1.13bn

+19.1% 2016

2017

2016

2015

£1.13bn

£0.95bn

£0.93bn

Adjusted EBITDA 

£44.0m

+20.0% 2016

23

 
A formula for growth

A transformational

acquisition

298

quality  
convenience  
stores

1,700 sq ft

average size of  
acquired stores

3,000+

new colleagues

24  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

In July 2017, we completed the transition  
of 298 newly acquired convenience stores. 
They are a perfect fit for McColl’s.

In 2017 we acquired 298 quality convenience stores 
from the Co-op. The majority are in neighbourhood 
locations, close to where people live, and on 
average they are 1,700 sq ft, which is similar in size  
to our best performing convenience stores.

We’ve worked hard with our wholesale supplier, 
Nisa, to develop the offer in these stores, initially 
seeking to replicate the range under previous 
ownership, in order to make the transition as easy  
as possible for customers. These stores now carry our 
widest selection of fresh food and grocery products 
and are accelerating our transition to a higher 
margin, food-based business.

We have learned a lot from the process that we 
can replicate elsewhere in the estate and with 
the integration complete we are exploring further 
opportunities, bringing some of McColl’s strengths  
to these stores, such as our excellent neighbourhood 
services proposition.

The stores were already profitable and we expect 
them to add around 30% to Group sales and 40% 
to Group profit on an annualised basis. With all of 
the stores transitioned by July, we have started to 
see the benefits flow through, and we are confident 
that, by applying the McColl’s flexible and efficient 
model, and with further synergies to be realised, 
over time they have the potential make an even 
more significant contribution to the Group.

25

A formula for growth continued

Our groundbreaking

supply

partnership

Six year

supply partnership

3,000+

products

400+

Safeway products

26  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

In August 2017 we announced a 
groundbreaking new supply partnership 
following a competitive tender of our 
wholesale supply contracts. 

Our new long-term partnership will see Morrisons, 
in time, supply all McColl’s stores with big brand 
products, plus a new range of Safeway products.

Not only will we be able to access a significantly 
improved fresh food offer, we will also be able to 
take advantage of improved commercial terms 
through partnership with a large, listed grocery 
retailer. This new deal has the additional benefit 
of simplifying our operations as we move from 
two wholesale supply partners to one for the 
entire estate.

Our phased rollout to 1,300 stores began in January 
2018 with the launch of around 400 Safeway 
products. They will be available exclusively at 
McColl’s for the first 12 months and we expect to 
grow and develop the range over time.

We’re excited to bring the much loved and trusted 
Safeway brand to McColl’s and we expect this 
partnership to materially benefit both sales and 
profits in the future.

27

A formula for growth continued

driving organic

growth

26

McColl’s stores 
refreshed in 2017

5-10%

sales uplift from  
early trials

100

stores to be  
refreshed in 2018

+50%

sales increase in  
key categories

28  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

There is huge potential in the McColl’s 
estate and we’re investing in our refresh 
programme to drive sustained  
organic growth. 

We have focused our recent investment on growing 
the business through acquisitions and converting 
hundreds of newsagents to convenience stores. 
A significant number of our older convenience 
stores have not had any meaningful investment 
for some time, and so, towards the end of 2016, we 
began developing our store refresh programme, 
starting with two pilot stores.

In 2017 we extended the trial to a further 25 stores, 
completely redesigning their layouts and ranges 
to create a better environment for customers, 
and meet the needs of a variety of convenience 
shopping missions. 

We have significantly increased the space 
dedicated to fresh and chilled foods, introduced 
new ranges such as healthier snacks and craft ales, 
and given a greater focus to food-to-go.

The customer feedback has been excellent and 
we’ve seen sales uplifts of 5-10% in these early trials, 
with some categories such as chilled food growing 
by as much as 100%.

In 2018 we will extend the refresh programme 
to 100 stores. We believe there are around 500 
convenience stores in our estate that would benefit 
from this investment and provide a source of 
organic growth in the future.

29

Our business model

Our vision is to become your 
neighbourhood’s favourite shop 
through our strategy focused on 
increasing our neighbourhood 
presence, growing our 
convenience offer and providing 
excellent customer service.

Our business model is underpinned  
by our core values:

Customer  
first

Simple and 
consistent

Caring and 
compassionate

Community 
champions

30  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

The resources and 
relationships we need

How we manage 
our supply chain

Colleagues
Our colleagues are our most important asset and a key driver in our 
vision to become your neighbourhood’s favourite shop.

Stores
We operate 1,611 stores across the UK comprising of 1,279 convenience 
stores and 332 newsagents. We manage all of our stores which means 
we can ensure strong retail standards.

by

In August 2017 we agreed a new long-term 
partnership with Morrisons. In January 2018 they 
began a phased rollout to supply our stores with 
big brands and a best-in-class fresh food and 
grocery offer through the Safeway brand.

Partners & suppliers
Our ability to run our stores efficiently relies on  
a strong relationship with our supply partners.

We buy from wholesale distributors which means  
we do not have the investment and working  
capital costs associated with a distribution  
network. It gives us greater flexibility and  
allows us to focus on our retail operations.

Brand & reputation
The McColl’s name has been around for over 100 years. Our brand 
and reputation are important to us and as the business evolves we 
are helping customers understand what they can expect  
from McColl’s.

IT
The information systems we have in place are crucial to the smooth 
running and efficiency of our business, and we continue to invest to 
ensure our systems are fit for purpose.

Strong financials
Our vision to grow the business both organically and by acquisition 
needs a robust balance sheet to fund this activity.

The majority of our products are delivered via 
two main wholesale distribution partners, with the 
remaining specialist categories, including news, 
cards and food-to-go delivered direct to our stores.

In 2017 our wholesale distribution partners were Palmer 
and Harvey (P&H)* and Nisa, with P&H supplying our 
newsagents and smaller convenience stores, and Nisa 
supplying our larger convenience stores.

*  On 28 November 2017 P&H was placed into administration. 

Following this, we have worked with our supply  chain 
partners (Nisa and Morrisons) to minimise disruption and 
ensure continuity of supply to affected stores.

What makes us the neighbourhood’s favourite shop

The value this creates

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

31%

of our customers  
visit our stores  
every day

60%

of our customers  
live within 400m  
of our stores

o c a l
t h e   h e a r t  
g   a t
o u r h o o d s  means  
n v e n i e n t choice  
b
  c u s tomers.
f  o u r

o

B

L
e i n
e i g
o f n
e ’r e   a   c
fo r l o t s  o
w

h

c.400

Safeway  
products

s
t
c
u
d
o

r

ns.

s, fresh 
als 
o, 
riety of 
-to-g
e
y m
d missio

d
o
o
f
d
e
a
p
e

r

a
v
e
d
w
a

i

r

r

p

o

f

n
a
s
d
e
e
n

rie
e
c
o
r
g
d
n
a
d
o
o

d
a
e
r
,
s
e
b
a

l

t

e
g
e
v

f

l

a

P

i

t

n

e

d

n

s

a

y

l

r

e

h

t

s

a

r

e

m

e

c

r

f

o

t

s

e

u

Customer  
first

c.3k

total products 

s

d

e

t

i

u

w

c

n

h

t
i

r

f

a

W

c

c

O

o

lle

ur w

f

o

u

s
t

C

u

n

m

e

o

a

h

b

g

o

u

r
c

eig

 in o

arm and friend l y  
es provide excell e n t
er service and are a dr i v i n g  
ur journey to becoming  y o u r
urhood’s favourite sho p.
stomer focus

Plus

Our Plus card rewards 
customers and drives loyalty

7 days

Our stores are open  
seven days a week

871

Collect+ points and 
Amazon lockers

1,125

r

y

Eve
k of o
vid
i

We thin
hub – pro
useful s
ple liv

e
r
vi

u

n

c

th

e

, 

a

e

s
,

n

e

y

n

e

d

c

l

d

ATMs

rs

a

y

e

l

v

e

g

s

g

a

s

r

e

s

e

a

t

a

n

r

peo

e

a

o

p

e

v

v

s

r

i

d

a

e

o

g

i

t

h

i
l

t

d

h

a

o

u

b

c

e

m

.

b

l

w

e

h

c

o

t

s

u

r

e

s

e

r

e

w
h
e
n

a
n
d

h
o
o
d

w m

h
c
u

p
o
h

s
 i

s

t it
g a s
n
orta
nitie
u
m

s

o

o

p
m

p le v alue havin
w just h
m unitie
aro und our stores. 
y a n d how im
p p ort co

t o  s u

a r b

W e  k n
o
p e
e

n

m

o

C

c.500

local organisations 
and good causes 
supported

588

Post Offices

£300k

raised for  
St George’s 
University  
Hospital

Reinvested in the business

Customers
We provide access to essential services, 
fresh food and grocery products for 
millions of people.

5m

customers every week

Colleagues
We are committed to looking after our 
colleagues so that they can look after  
our customers.

>90%

enjoy working  
for McColl’s

Social
Our stores are run by local people for local 
people which gives us a strong sense of 
community. We support a wide range of 
local organisations and good causes.

c.500

local organisations

Economic
We are investing for long term growth, 
which helps both our suppliers and the 
overall UK economy prosper.

* See glossary of terms on page 136 for definition

£20.3m

capital expenditure 
excluding the 
acquisition*

Shareholder returns
We are committed to delivering value to 
shareholders and sharing in our success 
through dividends.

10.3p

full year dividend

Margins
The strengthening mix in our sales is driving 
an improvement in our gross margin as 
we become less reliant on low margin 
traditional categories.

25.7%

gross margin

Shareholder funds
By continuing to grow the business we’re 
increasing the total shareholder funds 
that we will use to invest in the business.

£145.9m

shareholder funds

31

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Our performance KPIs

In 2017 we made good progress against all 
our key performance indicators (KPIs) 

We use six KPIs to monitor the 
performance of the business.

Revenue* 

£1.13bn

+19.1% 2016

Like-for-like sales*

+0.1%

+two percentage points vs 2016

Adjusted EBITDA* 

£44.0m

+20.0% 2016

We keep KPIs under review to ensure they remain 
appropriate and help determine remuneration 
policy. We show how we have performed against 
our current KPIs. 

2017

2016

2015

£1.13bn

£0.95bn

£0.93bn

-1.9%

-1.9%

2017

+0.1%

2016

2015

2017

2016

2015

£44.0m

£36.7m

£37.7m

In 2017 we introduced a new KPI when we 
announced our target, for grocery and alcohol  
to become our biggest sales category.

This year we have included a new KPI for basket 
size. As we grow our convenience offer we expect 
customers to do more top-up shopping with us  
and to grow our average basket size.

Total revenue grew by 
19.1%, principally driven 
by the acquisition of 298 
convenience stores.

Like-for-like sales (LFL) 
increased by 0.1%, a 
significant improvement on 
the previous year LFL of (1.9)%.

Adjusted EBITDA was up  
£7.3m year-on-year boosted 
by our acquisition of 298 
convenience stores.

Adjusted earnings per share*

18.3p

+14.3% 2016

Average basket size

£5.62

+7.3% 2016

Grocery and alcohol sales*

31%

32%

2017

2016

2015

18.3 pence

16.0 pence

15.9 pence

2017

2016

2015

£5.62

£5.24

£5.12

Adjusted earnings per share, 
increased by 2.3 pence 
to 18.3 pence.

We have seen continued 
growth in our average 
basket size as we develop 
our convenience offer and 
increase the proportion of 
top-up shopping missions at 
McColl’s.

37%

We have seen significant growth 
in grocery and alcohol sales 
and they now account for 32% 
of our total sales compared to 
27% in 2016.

  Grocery and alcohol

  Cigarettes and tobacco

  Impulse, news and other

* Please see glossary of terms on page 135 for definition.

Full details of adjusted EBITDA can be found in note 6 on page 110.

32  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

Financial review

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Building an exciting 
future for McColl’s

If 2016 was about laying solid foundations for 
the future of McColl’s, then 2017 has been about 
cementing in place the building blocks that will 
support our growth for years to come. With the 
on-boarding of over 300 new stores, the successful 
conclusion of our store refresh trial, and having 
agreed a groundbreaking new supply deal,  
McColl’s is well set for sustainable growth  
in 2018 and beyond.

Sales mix has continued to strengthen leading  
to gross margin improvement
As we continue to evolve our mix of stores and 
products, for the third consecutive year we saw a 
material improvement in gross profit margins, up 60 
basis points year-on-year to 25.7% (2016: 25.1%).

Gross margins are generally strongest in our larger 
convenience stores, which offer a bigger range 
of groceries, including fresh food. These stores 
now account for a significantly greater proportion 
of our estate following our recent acquisitions, 
and planned closure of marginal stores. 
Consequently our overall sales mix is continuing to 
strengthen as we become less dependent on lower 
margin traditional categories. 

Annual revenue exceeds £1bn, boosted  
by major acquisition
This year we reached a significant milestone, with 
our full-year revenue exceeding £1bn for the first 
time. It grew to £1.13bn (2016: £950.4m), an increase 
of 19.1%. This year-on-year growth was principally 
driven by the major acquisition we announced in 
2016. The 298 stores we acquired were transitioned 
to McColl’s over the course of seven months with the 
final store rebranded in mid-July 2017. A number of 
single store acquisitions were also completed in the 
second half of the year.

We continued to be impacted by the structural 
decline in traditional categories, principally news 
and confectionery. However, we have seen good 
growth in key grocery categories, including fresh 
food, and alcohol, which gave rise to a positive 
full-year like-for-like (LFL) of 0.1%, a significant 
improvement on the previous year LFL of (1.9)%. 
Sales in the stores we acquired and converted 
in 2015-16, which provide a barometer for the 
beneficial effects of recent capital investment,  
were up by 2.4% LFL.

33

Financial review continued

Adjusted operating profit 

£31.4m

+33.8% 2016

2017

2016

2015

£31.4m

£23.5m

£24.3m

Gross margin

25.7%

25.1% 2016

“ We are well on the way 
to meeting our strategic 
target for grocery and 
alcohol to be our biggest 
sales category.”

34  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

Tobacco is still currently our largest individual 
sales category (and our sales have held up well 
as we successfully transitioned to the new EUTPD2 
regulations in May). However, most critically, grocery 
and alcohol sales were up 43% year-on-year and 
are now 32% of our mix compared to 27% in 2016. 

Enhancing the quality of the McColl’s estate
We have enhanced the quality of the estate 
through both the acquisition of 298 quality 
convenience stores and the planned closure or 
disposal of underperforming stores. This resulted  
in a series of adjustments in the year. 

We are well on the way to meeting our strategic 
target for grocery and alcohol to be our biggest 
sales category and we expect to make further 
progress in 2018 as we annualise our acquisition  
and rollout the Safeway range in over 1,300 stores.

We had adjusting items of £5.0m associated with 
the 298 store acquisition, comprising £1.4m of 
legal fees and other professional adviser costs; 
£2.1m of setup and transition costs; and £1.5m of 
refinancing costs.

In terms of overall value, total gross profit grew by 
21.7%, from £238.7m to £290.4m, benefiting from the 
contribution of the newly acquired stores.

Adjusted operating profit materially advanced
Operating profit before adjusting items increased 
by £7.9m to £31.4m (2016: £23.5m), boosted by 
our acquisition, and the sale and leaseback of 
10 of the 116 acquired freehold stores. As well as 
releasing immediate value through this programme, 
we have been able to reinvest the proceeds to 
accelerate our store refreshes, and other capital 
investment priorities. We anticipate that this will be 
a sustainable profit and cash flow, with further sale 
and leasebacks planned in the short/medium term.

Adjusted operating profit excluding property-
related items (see note 6 for definition), was up 
£5.9m year-on-year to £28.3m (2016: £22.4m). 

In aggregate, administrative expenses as a 
percentage of revenue, before adjusting items 
were broadly flat year-on-year at 25.3% despite 
the impact of continued wage inflation and the 
higher costs (but also higher margins) of operating 
convenience stores. As well as working to offset 
the impacts of wage inflation through growth and 
gross margin enhancement, there are a number of 
capital initiatives planned for the coming year and 
beyond to improve efficiency and remove cost.

Other operating income increased by £1.6m to 
£24.8m (2016: £23.1m) reflecting additional income 
from the newly acquired stores, 38 of which have  
a Post Office service.

We also had adjusting items of £2.9m relating to 
a new, broader initiative to close or dispose of 
marginal stores. In the year 73 stores were sold 
or closed, most of which were underperforming 
newsagents and smaller convenience stores,  
as we seek to optimise our estate.

In total there were £7.9m of gross (pre-tax) adjusting 
items, split into £6.4m of adjusting items to operating 
profit and a £1.5m adjustment to finance costs. 
Net adjustments (post-tax) were £6.9m.

Net finance costs increased as we invest  
in growing the business
Adjusted net finance costs increased to £5.1m 
(2016: £2.7m). This reflects the increase in our debt as 
we have invested in growing the business through 
the significant acquisition.

The adjustment of £1.5m to finance costs noted 
above relates to undrawn facility fees for the new 
term loan to support the acquisition, and the 
write-off of fees from our previous refinancing.

Profit before tax impacted by adjusting items
Profit on ordinary activities before taxation 
increased to £18.4m (2016: £17.7m). This was 
impacted by the £7.9m of adjusting items relating 
to the acquisition (£5.0m) and planned closures 
(£2.9m) as described above.

Before adjusting items, profit before tax increased 
by £5.5m to £26.3m (2016: £20.8m).

Stable effective rate of tax 
The tax charge for the period increased to £4.2m 
(2016: £3.7m), representing an effective tax rate of 
22.9% (2016: 21.2%). This effective rate compares to 
an average statutory rate for the period of 19.3%. 

Double-digit percentage growth in adjusted 
earnings per share
Basic earnings per share slightly reduced to  
12.3 pence (2016: 12.8 pence). Adjusted earnings 
per share, however, increased to 18.3 pence 
(2016: 16.0 pence).

Dividend per share increased
I am pleased to confirm that the Board has 
recommended a final dividend of 6.9 pence per 
share (2016: 6.8 pence). The total dividend for the 
period has slightly increased to 10.3 pence per 
share (2016: 10.2 pence), reflecting our commitment 
to improve returns to shareholders as we grow the 
business. As previously advised, looking forward 
it is management’s intention to move towards 
a policy of a 50% payout ratio to profit after tax 
(before adjusting gains but after adjusting losses), 
as earnings (and therefore pence per share 
payouts) increase. 

Asset base strengthened by investment
We have continued to grow the business, increasing 
total shareholder funds at the end of the year by 
£5.4m to £145.9m (2016: £140.5m). 

Our ongoing programme of capital investment 
increased the book value of goodwill and other 
intangibles, property, plant and equipment by 
£131.4m to £352.5m (2016: £221.1m). 

Current assets at the end of the period increased 
to £130.6m (2016: £97.7m). This increase of £32.9m is 
a result of an increase in stock of £20.9m and Trade 
Receivables of £5.2m with the growth in our estate 
following our acquisition, plus an increase in cash 
and cash equivalents of £10.5m due to higher levels 
of cash in transit and a lower overdraft, partly offset 
by reduction in assets held for sale. 

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Our current liabilities increased to £173.4m 
(2016: £139.1m), reflecting higher trade and other 
payables driven by business growth and increased 
provisions due to our store closure programme.

Non-current liabilities increased to £177.6m 
(2016: £50.2m), as we extended our borrowings  
to finance the acquisition.

Dividend

 10.3p

10.2p 2016

Pension schemes stable, actuarial  
review completed
We operate two defined benefit pension schemes, 
the TM Group Pension Scheme and the TM Pension 
Plan, both of which are closed to future accrual. 
The combined accounting surplus (based on 
corporate bond yields) in the two schemes at 
the end of the period further improved to £10.3m 
(2016: £6.1m), as a result of strong returns on assets.

We concluded the actuarial review of the two 
schemes in June 2017. This review concluded that 
the combined funding deficit of our two pension 
schemes was £12.6m, broadly similar to that at the 
previous actuarial valuation. Therefore only a minor 
incremental cash contribution will be made in the 
current review period.

The Company currently contributes approximately 
£1.6m per year, inclusive of fees and levies.

Consistent cash generation supports  
future growth
The cash generation of McColl’s continues to 
support significant investment in the business and 
a strong dividend yield for shareholders, whilst also 
controlling debt levels.

Net cash provided by operating activities 
increased in the year to £54.2m (2016: £21.6m). 
This was supported by increased business scale 
and profits, favourable working capital flows 
and lower underlying capex (i.e. excluding the 
major acquisition).

Adjusted EBITDA excluding property-related items 
(see note 6 on page 110 for definition) increased by 
£7.3m to £44.0m (2016: £36.7m).

Net cash from operating activities

 £54.2m

£21.6m 2016

Growing basket spend
As we develop our convenience offer and we are able to provide a better, 
broader food offer for customers, we are capturing more of their spend. 
Our average basket size is £5.62, up 7.3% year-on-year.

35

Future outlook
2017 has been a very important year for the 
business, set against the backdrop of major 
changes in the grocery sector and particularly 
the convenience channel. We have looked to 
capitalise upon the opportunities this has afforded, 
particularly with the announcement of a strategic 
partnership with a FTSE 100 grocery retailer. 
We believe that this move, alongside the additional 
focus on store refreshes to unlock further organic 
growth, stands us in good stead for the short, 
medium and long term, as we look to fully exploit 
the benefits of a larger, more food-focused and 
better invested-in business. 

Simon Fuller
Chief Financial Officer

Excluding the acquisition, net capital expenditure 
(which excludes the acquisition of stock), reduced 
by £5.4m to £20.3m (2016: £25.7m). We continue 
to invest in the business for growth, including our 
programme of store acquisitions and refreshes, 
alongside the development and extension of our 
services and food-to-go offer.

In the period we added 310 convenience stores, 
completed 26 store refreshes and delivered six new 
Subways in our stores.

Net finance expense of £5.1m (excluding adjusting 
items) was higher than the prior year, reflecting 
increased borrowings and a higher interest rate 
given leverage levels. The interim and final dividends 
paid in the period totalled £11.7m, up slightly in total 
cash terms due to the additional shares now in issue.

Net debt at the end of the period was £142.2m 
(2016: £37.0m), representing 3.2 times adjusted 
EBITDA (2016: 1.0 times adjusted EBITDA). This ratio 
reduces on a 12 month rolling EBITDA basis and 
is in line with the leverage profile that had been 
anticipated by management.

Debt refinancing package to support major 
acquisition
In 2016, we renegotiated our debt facilities, to 
support our major acquisition. The previous £85m 
working capital facility was extended to £100m 
and supplemented by a £100m repayment term 
loan. Both of these elements will run through until 
July 2021, with the interest rate reducing as the 
business deleverages. At the end of the period, 
drawings against the total facility were in line 
with management expectations at £154.5m 
(2016: £37.0m).

Financial review continued

36  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

Social and environmental review

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

McColl’s
and
responsibility

We are committed to operating responsibly, 
supporting neighbourhoods where our 
customers live, and our colleagues work.

37

Social and environmental review continued

Our vision is to be your neighbourhood’s 
favourite shop. We will only achieve this 
vision if we are a good neighbour in all 
respects and that means managing  
our environmental impact, supporting  
local communities and looking after  
our colleagues.

With everyday access to fresh food and groceries, 
plus a range of services such as ATMs, bill payment, 
Post Offices and internet collection points, our 
stores provide a vital service to lots of communities. 
In fact, based on a recent survey, convenience 
stores and Post Offices are the two services that 
have the most positive impact on a local area.

Community champions
Our role in the local community goes beyond being 
a neighbourhood retailer and our stores are actively 
involved in supporting their local communities. 
Through the ‘Making a Difference Locally’ scheme, 
where a proportion of sales we make on selected 
products are donated to a charity fund, we have 
supported a range of local causes, chosen by each 
store, including scout groups, schools, hospitals and 
local charities.

To date we have supported almost 500 local 
organisations, charities and good causes.

Through our Halloween charity campaign, 
colleagues and customers also raised money to 
support St George’s University Hospital’s research 
into sudden cardiac death in young people. 
This year we presented them with a cheque for 
£300,000 which brings our total to over £1m in  
funds to support this important research.

Charitable donations
During the year, the following donations 
were made:

Region

Charity

England St George’s University Hospital
Scotland Ronald McDonald House
Hope House and Tyˆ Hafan
Wales

Donation  
amount

£300,000
£59,000
£14,400

£373,400

These donations were raised from both carrier bag 
sales and the Group’s own Halloween-related 
fundraising activities.

The Group donates four pence (net of VAT) from 
every carrier bag sale to specific charities in 
England, Scotland and Wales. 

38  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Colleagues

Making all the difference
Excellent customer service is essential to the success 
of our business and that’s why it’s a strategic priority 
for us. We can only deliver excellent customer 
service with the hard work and dedication of our 
colleagues. We have 22,260 colleagues, including 
over 6,000 Home News Deliverers, and altogether 
we employ the equivalent of 8,440 full-time 
colleagues. Many of our colleagues live locally to 
our stores which helps give them a strong sense 
of community and customers consistently rate us 
highly on colleague friendliness and helpfulness. 

Through our business briefings, annual retail 
exhibition and colleague magazine we keep 
colleagues updated on business strategy and 
performance, as well as any broader financial 
or economic factors that may impact us. 
We encourage colleague involvement in our 
strategic performance through operation of a 
performance-related bonus scheme which applies 
to over 100 senior employees and provides an 
incentive to them. We also operate an active sales 
incentive that gives stores the opportunity to earn 
a bonus each period creating an incentive for 
retail colleagues.

As the business is evolving and we’re developing our 
fresh food credentials it’s important for colleagues 
to receive the right training to support our growth. 
This year we delivered fresh food training to around 
900 Store Managers in our convenience stores. 

We also launched Training@McColls in February 
2018 which will allow us to deliver a range of training, 
including compliance and customer service to all 
our colleagues using interactive digital learning 
modules. Colleagues can choose to access this 
eTraining on their own mobile and tablet devices 
so it is much more flexible and convenient.

Listening to our colleagues
We want all our colleagues to feel a part of 
McColl’s. Making sure they are engaged is really 
important to us, so that they enjoy working for 
McColl’s and management can take into account 
their views when making decisions that will 
impact them. 

We hold a series of regular business briefings and 
senior manager meetings that give colleagues an 
opportunity to ask questions and give feedback. 
We also conduct an annual colleague survey 
and an interim ‘pulse’ survey. This enables all our 
colleagues to share their views on working for 
McColl’s, and helps us identify things we need to 
improve on. Last year over 90% of colleagues said 
that they enjoy their job and around 80% would 
recommend McColl’s as a great place to work. 

In the year ahead we will take this a step further and 
launch our colleague forums that will give us more 
insight into the data behind the survey. They will 
enable us to engage colleagues on a more regular 
basis and really understand any issues or concerns 
they may have.

Developing our people
Whether they are at the start of their career with 
McColl’s or looking to take the next step, we are 
investing in our colleagues and making sure they 
have the right skills they need to do their job.

For those colleagues wishing to progress, we 
operate our successful ‘onward and upward’ 
development programme focusing on some of 
the key roles within the business. We have a good 
track record of promoting colleagues with 56% of 
Store Manager vacancies being filled internally, 
56% of our Area Managers having been promoted 
from store management and 60% of our Regional 
Managers having been promoted from area 
management. Many of our Store Managers started 
out with us on a paper round or as Sales Assistants, 
underlining the career opportunities we provide 
and the role we play for local people and the 
younger generation.

This year we’ve invested in almost 30,000 hours 
of training for our c.3,000 new colleagues that 
have joined us from the Co-op, alongside 
our regular induction training for new starters. 
Around 300 colleagues are currently taking part 
in our apprenticeship programmes.

39

Social and environmental review continued

Supporting women to reach their potential
We have a strong track record of promoting women to store management 
and 51% of our current managers are female. We know there are many 
talented women in our business and we want to ensure they continue to 
progress with McColl’s. This year we have been developing our approach 
to help women in our business reach their full potential, starting with our 
women’s forums that are helping us to understand the barriers to promotion.

40  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

34%

Store colleagues

Male

Female

Store managers

Male

Female

Senior managers

Male

Female

Directors

Male

Female

28%

29%

66%

49%

51%

72%

71%

We are developing our leadership capability and 
currently have over 30 managers on our leadership 
programme. This year we have also redefined the 
leadership skills and behaviours that are required 
to be a great manager, and redesigned our Area 
Managers’ Academy.

Rewarding and recognising our people
We offer a range of benefits for colleagues as 
well as flexible working opportunities. Through our 
colleague handbook, our online colleague portal, 
email updates and our Talking Shop magazine we 
explain the benefits that are available. These range 
from colleague discount in our stores to health 
care plans and a wide range of offers on days 
out and experiences. 

We know how important it is that colleagues feel 
valued and are recognised for their hard work. 
This year we celebrated outstanding contributions 
from a number of our store colleagues at our  
All Stars Awards evening. 

We want to make it easier to recognise great 
performance across the business and say thank 
you to colleagues who have demonstrated the 
company values in the work that they do. We’ve 
developed a new recognition plan and designed 
tools to support this, including the introduction of 
McColl’s Thank You cards.

Fostering diversity and inclusion
We are an equal opportunities employer. We do 
not discriminate against colleagues on the basis of 
age, disability, gender, marital or civil partner status, 
pregnancy or maternity, race, colour, nationality, 
ethnic or national origin, religion or belief, or sexual 
orientation. These principles of non-discrimination 
and equality of opportunity also apply to the way in 
which colleagues treat visitors, customers, suppliers 
and former colleagues. 

From April 2018 the UK Government requires all 
employers with more than 250 employees to publish 
their gender pay gap, showing the difference in the 
average pay between men and women across the 
entire business, regardless of job role.

65% of our colleagues are women and our gender 
pay gap in 2017 was 3.0% (the UK average gender 
pay gap is 18.4% – ONS, 2017). We are confident 
that men and women are paid the same salary 
for fulfilling the same job role at McColl’s. However, 
a gender pay gap exists in our business because 
women are underrepresented in senior roles in 
some functions.

We know that taking considered and deliberate 
action to ensure talented women progress is 
important, together with instilling an inclusive 
culture. Our recently launched company values will 
help to guide us in making McColl’s a great place 
to work and we will continue to support colleagues 
through the delivery of a strong people plan.

More information on the results of our gender 
pay gap analysis and our approach to 
developing female talent can be found at 
www.mccollsplc.co.uk/genderpaygap.

Health and safety
We continue to demonstrate our commitment to 
health and safety across the Group. It is discussed 
by the Board, and through our health and safety 
committee we take a consistent and collaborative 
approach to creating a safe place for our 
colleagues, customers and visitors. 

In 2017, colleague safety remained a key focus 
and we introduced improved incident reporting, 
facilitating a more collaborative response across 
the business. 

We continued to invest in colleague safety 
technology across key locations working with 
our two partners, SoloProtect and Positive 
Response, to install, and train colleagues to use 
lone working devices. These devices have panic 
alarms connected to monitoring centres with 

audio capability and improved police response. 
We have also entered into two new partnerships: 
one with Kingdom Services to provide guarding 
cover in some of our more vulnerable stores; and 
one with National Business Crime Solutions, who 
provide a vital link between other retailers and the 
Police allowing intelligence to be shared quickly 
and efficiently.

We work closely with insurers, brokers and local 
authorities to advance our risk management, for 
example by increasing proactive risk management 
in stores. By improving the level of compliance 
across our business we saw a continued downturn  
in both employee and public liability claims. 

We launched our Safer for Stores programme in 
November 2017 to help all store colleagues manage 
security risks. This was supported by the introduction 
of a guide, colleague video and security poster.

Across a large estate of stores, there are inevitably 
incidents and accidents. We recognise we have 
a duty of care to understand and address the 
risks within the business in order to ensure, as far as 
possible, we keep our colleagues and customers 
safe. Where there are incidents, we examine the 
circumstances and draw learnings from what 
occurred so that we can continually improve our 
approach to safety. All initiatives are managed and 
monitored through a health and safety committee 
of Executives and Senior Management, together 
with the Health and Safety Manager.

Looking ahead
Our colleagues are our greatest asset and in the 
year ahead we will continue to work to ensure that 
every colleague feels welcome at McColl’s, that 
they feel safe at work, that they have the training 
they need to do their job, and that they have the 
opportunity to progress if they wish to. 

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Human rights
We treat people in line with internationally recognised human rights 
principles. The Group does not have a specific human rights policy; however, 
a number of policies are in place that demonstrate effective management 
of human rights issues in the business, including an Anti-Bribery and 
Anti-Corruption Policy, Anti-Harassment & Bullying Policy, Health and  
Safety Policy and a Policy for Speaking up in Confidence.

We are absolutely committed to preventing modern slavery in all our 
activities and ensuring that our supply chain is free from slavery and 
trafficking. Our Modern Slavery Statement for the year 2017/18  
(pursuant to s.54 of the Modern Slavery Act 2015) can be found at 
www.mccollsplc.co.uk/modernslaverystatement.

41

Social and environmental review continued

Supporting food banks
In 2017 we supported the Trussell Trust, a charity that operates a network 
of food banks providing emergency food and support to people in crisis. 
We have raised £140,000 through a combination of local store donations  
and fund raising activity, as well as providing a storage facility at our head 
office site in Brentwood.

42  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

Environment
As part of our commitment to being a responsible 
business, we aim to act in a sustainable way, 
through driving efficiency, reducing waste, recycling 
and compliance.

Improving energy efficiency
We have an ongoing commitment to improving our 
energy efficiency. This year, following the roll-out 
of energy-efficient LED lighting to over 1,100 stores 
in 2016, we extended this programme to another 
150 stores, including a significant number of those 
recently acquired from the Co-op.

We have also switched to a more energy-efficient 
refrigeration supplier so that any new units installed 
in our stores will have more environmentally friendly 
double-glazed doors. 

We continue to remove surplus or particularly 
inefficient equipment from our stores and install ‘last 
person out’ switches (where all the lights can be 
switched off via one switch), as well as photocells 
that switch lighting on and off when areas 
aren’t used. 

Many of our stores have live energy monitors so we 
can see how much energy each store uses in real 
time and actively manage them accordingly.

The energy saving measures we have put in place 
have helped us reduce our LFL energy consumption 
by a further 7.6% in 2017, despite increasing our 
overall chilled and frozen space.

Managing waste

Recycling
Through our arrangements with our key wholesale 
distributors we recycle plastic and cardboard used 
in our business. The same lorries that arrive with 
products leave with plastic and cardboard, so no 
additional miles are involved – it’s a neat energy-
efficient way to recycle packaging.

Food waste
Our regular waste management routines ensure 
that we maintain very low levels of food waste. 
We have a strong focus on managing waste and it’s 
a key metric for all our Store Managers.

We conduct weekly reviews of the previous weeks’ 
waste which can result in a number of different 
actions, including, working with our wholesale 
distributors to supply smaller case sizes; changing 
our ordering algorithms; reviewing product quality 
and pricing; changing product pack sizes; reducing 
distribution of particular products, and in some 
cases delisting; and store training to improve waste 
routines such as stock rotation and mark-downs.

This year we joined The Grocer’s campaign to 
reduce food waste which aims to unite the grocery 
industry in tackling this important issue.

Greenhouse gas emissions
Our overall carbon emissions were 53,651 tonnes 
CO2 (2016 51,316 tonnes CO2). This increase reflects 
a significantly larger estate following our acquisition 
of 298 convenience stores. This resulted in a 34% 
increase in scope 1 emissions as we have increased 
the number of stores with a higher proportion of 
refrigeration space. Scope 2 emissions were broadly 
flat year-on-year despite the enlarged estate, as a 
result of lower LFL energy consumption (down 7.6% 
year-on-year) and a 15% reduction in the emission 
factor for UK electricity.

Our carbon intensity ratio reduced to 4.7, down from 
5.4 in 2016. 

The Group is required to measure and report direct 
and indirect greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions 
pursuant to the Companies Act 2006 (Strategic 
Report and Directors’ Report) Regulations 2013. 
This is the fourth GHG emissions report in line with 
UK mandatory reporting requirements set out by 
the Department for Environment, Food and Rural 
Affairs (DEFRA) and we have therefore expressed 
the report alongside the ‘base year’ of 2014 for 
comparison. The mandatory requirement is for the 
disclosure of the Scope 1 and 2 emissions only. 
Scope 1 emissions include heating, vehicle fuel and 
fugitive emissions (refrigerant leakage). Scope 2 
emissions include purchased electricity. The Group’s 
total GHG footprint is shown in the table below.

Emissions data for period 28 November 2016 to 26 November 2017

Scope 1
Fuel combustion (natural gas, vehicle fuels and other fuels)
Refrigerants

Scope 1 total
Scope 2
Purchased Electricity

Total of Scope 1 and 2

2014  
Tonnes  
CO2(e) 
(base year)

2,125
2,122

4,247

51,884

56,131

2016  
Tonnes  
CO2(e)

2,268
2,897

5,165

46,151

51,316

2017  
Tonnes  
CO2(e)

2,357
4,569

6,926

46,725

53,651

Intensity – CO2(e) tonnes per £100,000 of revenue

6.1

5.4

4.7

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

•  The Group has reported on all the measured emissions sources 
required under the Companies Act 2006 (Strategic Report and 
Directors’ Reports) Regulations 2013

•  The Group has used the guidance as set out in Defra’s 

Environmental Reporting Guidelines, including mandatory 
greenhouse gas emissions reporting guidance, dated 
June 2013

•  Emission factors are based upon UK Government conversion 
factors for Company Reporting 2017. The electricity emissions 
are based upon a reduced emission factor for electricity in 
2017 reflecting the UK’s increasing use of renewable energy in 
the overall electricity grid mix

•  The Group has engaged a consultancy firm, The Miles 

Consultancy, to oversee the collection of vehicle data and 
provide guidance on complying with appropriate regulations. 
Data collected has included fuel use and mileage, and 
business mileage has been calculated on the basis of actual 
fuel use recorded, applying 2017 emission factors for diesel 
and petrol (bio-fuel blends)

•  The figures disclosed for 2017 and the methodology used to 
collate the information has been reviewed and verified by 
Project Rome Ltd

•  For electricity, gas and other fuels, consumption data has 
been extracted from billing information from the start of 
the reporting period to the date of the last bill received for 
each type of supply. Therefore some extrapolation has been 
required in order to calculate the full 52-week consumption 
figure. Data has been provided by British Independent Utilities

•  Petrol and fuel data has been collated from information 

received from the Group’s fleet management consultant. 
Data for 11 months of the reporting year is calculated using 
data captured directly from the fleet. For the final month of the 
reporting year, data has been estimated using an average 
based on the previous 11 months

•  Refrigerant data has been calculated by reference to 

individual items of equipment and then extrapolating this 
based on an estimated level of equipment within each 
property used by the Group. The methodology utilises annual 
leakage rates as set out in Appendix C of the Environmental 
Reporting Guidelines for mandatory greenhouse gas emissions

43

 
Principal risks and uncertainties

How we identify and manage risk

Risk management framework

Risk
identification

Risk
reporting

Risk 
assessment

Strategy
setting

Risk
policies

Risk
ownership

Risk
appetite

Risk identification and assessment
Risks are identified and assessed at all levels 
within the organisation, from individual store 
risk assessments through to identification and 
assessment of Group-wide strategic threats. 
We operate detailed procedures and appropriate 
training in store to ensure the safety and security of 
our colleagues and customers and protection of our 
property. At Group level, we look at a wide range 
of factors including customer trends, competition, 
economic conditions, regulatory developments, 
technological issues, counterparty security and 
financial matters to work out what the main threats 
to our business could be.

Risk ownership
Once a risk has been identified, responsibility 
for management of that risk is clearly defined. 
This equally applies in our stores, where an 
appropriate risk culture promotes personal 
responsibility for operating safely and for 
carrying out regular checks on potential hazards. 
Where a hazard cannot be dealt with simply and 
immediately, a reporting process exists to escalate 
the matter for resolution. Similarly, at Group level, 
risks relating to, for example, finance, legal, data, 
trading partners and operations, are monitored and 
managed through a variety of controls, including 
detailed procedures and delegations of authority to 
appropriately experienced and qualified individuals 
or groups such as our Group Risk Committee.

Like all businesses, McColl’s is 
exposed to a number of internal 
and external factors which could 
positively or negatively affect 
its performance. Whilst minor 
variations in circumstances and 
outcomes will always occur, a 
proactive approach to those 
significant matters that could 
threaten successful delivery of 
our short and long term goals 
is essential.

Our risk framework seeks to identify those threats, 
quantify how likely it is they will occur and how 
significant their impact could be. Mitigating actions 
are then applied to reduce the likelihood and 
impact to a level that is acceptable to the Board 
and monitor the effectiveness of those actions 
to ensure that they have the intended effect. 
Our understanding of these risks also informs our 
strategic choices for the business. 

As our strategy and plans evolve and the 
environment in which we operate changes, so our 
assessment and management of risk must keep 
pace. We therefore adopt a continual process of 
risk identification, assessment, management and 
monitoring as illustrated here.

44  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

Risk appetite and risk policies
Having quantified and understood our risks, the 
Board, guided by the Audit & Risk Committee, 
considers what level of risk can be accepted 
within the business in pursuit of our strategic goals. 
The Board requires all risks to be appropriately 
managed and, where they cannot be sufficiently 
reduced or removed entirely, considers whether 
the risk should be transferred, for example through 
insurance cover or hedging arrangements.

A vital component of the Board’s risk related 
responsibilities is that of fostering an appropriate 
risk culture. During the year, four new values were 
adopted by the business which are consistent with 
managing risk well within the business. These values 
have already been incorporated into some of 
our risk-related policies and will continue to be 
introduced into others as they fall due for review. 

Our values are:

Customer
first

Simple and
consistent

Caring and
compassionate

Community
champions

Having understood the threats faced and 
the extent to which they have been reduced, 
eliminated or transferred, the Board determines its 
risk appetite and the strategy that can be delivered 
within acceptable risk parameters. A new or 
amended strategy can often give rise to new risks 
and these need to be identified and assessed and 
built into the management and reporting processes 
described above.

Risk reporting
The reporting of risk is an important step in the 
overall process. Reporting not only raises awareness 
and initiates discussion, it can also provide 
additional insight into the aggregation of risks that 
may not be immediately apparent when a single 
risk is considered or managed in isolation. 

Risks, both operational and strategic, are reported 
to our Group Risk Committee, which comprises our 
Retail Board members, Health & Safety Manager 
and Company Secretary. This committee brings 
together senior representatives from all areas of 
the business to consider collectively, and from 
their different functional perspectives, the more 
significant risks faced by the business.

The Group Risk Committee reports, and escalates as 
appropriate, matters of risk to the Retail Board which 
has responsibility for supporting the Chief Executive 
in his delivery of the Group strategy and business 
objectives. The Audit & Risk Committee periodically 
reviews risks and makes recommendations to the 
Board. Individual matters of a significant nature are 
also escalated to the Board where appropriate.

Resources and structure
To undertake this work, appropriate structure and 
resources are needed to manage all the tasks that 
make up the risk management framework and to 
ensure that risks are appropriately understood and 
dealt with by all our colleagues. We have organised 
our internal resources as indicated here to ensure 
that the risk framework is embedded throughout 
the business.

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Risk management structure

Our risk framework is supported by the risk management structure 
detailed below:

Board

Executive Directors

Audit & Risk Committee

Retail Board

Operational Risk Committee

Functional Areas

Colleagues

External support 
and expertise

45

Principal risks and uncertainties continued

The risk management 
processes described 
above are continual and 
risks evolve. However, at 
present, the Board, with 
the assistance of the 
Audit & Risk Committee, 
considers the following to 
be the principal risks facing 
the Group.

Maintained

Increased

New

46  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

l

i

a
p
c
n
i
r
P

k
s
i
R

k
s
i
R
e
h
t

f

o
e
r
u
t

a
N

s
n
o
i
t

a
g
i
t
i

m
k
s
i
R

s
e
g
n
a
h
c
t
n
e
r
r
u
C

Strategy

Supply chain

Supply chain transition

Competition

Customer Offer

Economy

Financial and treasury

Information Technology Operational cost base

Regulation

If the Board either adopts the wrong 
strategy or does not implement it 
effectively the aims of the business, 
its performance and reputation  
may suffer.

We rely on a small number of key 
distributors and may be adversely 
affected by changes in supplier 
dynamics and interruptions in supply.

During 2018, we will be transitioning 
the wholesale arrangements for 
the majority of our estate to a new 
supplier. As with any significant 
project, there is a risk that it will not 
be delivered to plan.

We operate in a highly competitive 
environment, which is continually 
changing and has been subject to 
consolidation. Failure to maintain 
market share could have an adverse 
effect on our core business and 
deflate sales and profitability.

Customer shopping habits are 

influenced by a wide range of 

All our revenue is generated in 

the UK. Any deterioration in the 

factors. If we do not respond to their 

UK economy, for example as a 

The main financial risks are the 

availability of short- and long-

term funding to meet business 

We depend on the reliability and 

We have a relatively high cost 

We operate in an environment 

capability of key information systems 

base, consisting primarily of salary, 

governed by strict regulations to 

and technology. A major failure, a 

property rental and energy costs. 

ensure the safety and protection of 

changing needs they are more likely 

consequence of Brexit, could affect 

needs, fluctuations in interest rates, 

breach, or prolonged performance 

Increases in these costs without a 

customers, colleagues, shareholders 

to shop with a competitor and our 

consumer spending and cost of 

movements in energy prices and 

issues with store or head office 

corresponding increase in revenues 

and other stakeholders. Regulations 

reputation could suffer, resulting in 

goods, which in turn would impact 

other post-Brexit impacts.

could adversely impact our 

include alcohol licensing, 

falling revenues.

our sales and profitability.

systems could have an adverse 

impact on the business and its 

reputation.

profitability.

•  Our strategic development is led 
by an experienced Board and 
Senior Management 

•  We establish long-

term relationships with 
trusted suppliers

•  There is close oversight 
by the Retail Board and 
Senior Management

•  An annual strategic review takes 
place alongside our budget-
setting process

•  The McColl’s strategy is widely 

communicated and understood 
across the business

•  Business plans are developed, 

monitored and reviewed 
against strategic KPIs

•  Senior Management are 

incentivised with performance-
related rewards to deliver our 
strategic goals

•  Our distribution partners 

•  We undertook a significant 

maintain their own contingency 
planning as do we

•  We closely monitor supplier 
performance including 
service levels and hold regular 
discussions with them to address 
any issues

•  We monitor the financial stability 

of key partners

•  We regularly review our supply 
chain arrangements, with full 
tenders completed in 2013 
and 2017

amount of planning and testing 
work to identify and resolve 
potential issues and have 
instigated close monitoring of 
the rollout programme

•  We have a dedicated and 
skilled management team 
with extensive experience of 
managing supply arrangements

•  We have established clear lines 
of communication and a joint 
project management approach 
with our new supplier

•  Phased rollout is designed 
to ensure the transition is 
manageable and adapted 
where necessary

•  We monitor competitor activity 

and customer trends

•  Regular meetings are held 

with key suppliers to optimise 
our offer 

•  Development of the Plus card 

loyalty scheme continues

•  We are increasing brand 

awareness through marketing 

•  Improvement of our estate and 

stores is ongoing 

•  Local refit programmes 

are undertaken to counter 
specific threats

Key strategic challenges for 2018 
include successful transition to new 
supply arrangements and significant 
store refresh programme. Ongoing 
change and consolidation in the 
sector may also impact our business.

Uncertainties in the market and the 
planned transition to a new supplier 
increase the risk in the shorter term. 
The recent collapse of Palmer & 
Harvey tested our contingency 
arrangements. The business is now 
more reliant on its remaining legacy 
supply partner whilst we transition to 
our new wholesale arrangements.

The transition project has been 
carefully planned and tested. 
Implementation is being closely 
monitored and there is a clear route 
to escalate any issues if required. 
The rollout plan is ambitious but is 
designed to ensure the team is not 
over-stretched.

Our new supply arrangements, 
including the exclusive launch 
of the Safeway brand and 
enhancement of our range, will 
bring competitive advantage. 
Our store refresh programme 
will enhance our customers’ 
shopping experience.

employment, health and safety, 

data protection and the rules of the 

Stock Exchange. Failure to comply 

with relevant laws and regulations 

could result in sanctions and 

reputational damage.

•  Membership of third party 

organisations (such as the 

Institute of Grocery Distribution 

and the Association of 

Convenience Stores) gives 

us greater insight into the 

convenience sector trends 

and developments

•  Our new Customer Director 

will enhance the Retail Board’s 

capability to address changing 

customer needs 

•  Promotional programmes offer 

customers great value

•  We have a customer loyalty 

scheme – Plus card

•  Our strong customer service 

standards are reflected in our 

evolving brand strategy

•  We complete detailed 

customer research for key 

projects, for example our store 

refurbishment programme

•  We sell food and household 

•  Committed loan facilities are 

•  All business-critical systems 

•  We continually seek to remove 

•  We have clear accountability 

essentials which are 

not considered to be 

highly discretionary

in place, which provide us with 

are well established and are 

headroom to deliver our strategy 

supported by an appropriate 

(see notes 22 and 30)

disaster recovery strategy 

designed to ensure continuity  

of the business 

•  Business continuity plans are 

tested on an annual basis

unnecessary complexity from 

our operational procedures to 

optimise performance

for compliance with all laws 

and regulations

•  Our policies and procedures 

•  We operate a flexible staff model 

are designed to meet all 

aligned to revenue levels

relevant requirements

•  We monitor legislation and 

•  We train colleagues to comply 

•  We offer a wide range of 

•  Funding requirements 

products at different price points, 

e.g. value and premium brands

•  Our flexible business model 

are managed through 

regular forecasting and 

treasury management

allows us to respond to changes 

•  The Board approves budgets 

•  Regular reviews assess our 

in customer behaviour, 

for example, by adapting 

our ranges

and business plans 

•  Relationships with lenders 

are managed through 

vulnerability and our ability to 

re-establish operations in the 

event of a failure

•  Our growing scale enables us 

regular meetings

•  Testing is performed to ensure 

function with regular review 

data is controlled and protected

processes in place

with all relevant legislation

•  We have established 

governance groups, such as 

our Health and Safety Strategy 

Committee to review and 

manage our compliance

•  Through third party memberships 

and expert advice, we keep  

up-to-date with evolving statute

developments related to our 

costs, e.g. minimum wage, rents 

and energy tariffs, to allow us to 

plan and mitigate increases 

•  Property management is a key 

•  We minimise energy costs 

by combining energy 

efficiency initiatives and 

forward purchasing

•  We regularly retender external 

contracts to ensure they remain 

market-competitive

to achieve better buying terms, 

helping to mitigate inflationary 

pressures and we are already 

working with our new supply 

partner to achieve this

•  We are growing our range of 

own brand products through  

the rollout of Safeway

•  Our risks associated with 

financial instruments are 

disclosed in note 30 on page 122

•  We manage exposure to 

fluctuating energy prices by 

forward buying electricity. 

We acknowledge that the 

forward contracts in place are 

derivatives, they are treated as a 

pre-agreed price for electricity

Our new supply arrangements will 

Ongoing economic uncertainty 

We have commenced an annual 

We are preparing for compliance 

National Living Wage and National 

Regulations impacting our business 

increase our access to a wider range 

increases the risk of a loss of 

programme of sale and leaseback 

with the General Data Protection 

Minimum Wage will again increase 

continue to change but we have 

of the excellent quality products that 

consumer confidence. Further joint 

of stores purchased as part of the 298 

Regulations, which come into effect 

above the rate of inflation in 2018. 

processes in place to make sure we 

our customers want at competitive 

plans will be developed with supply 

store acquisition to release further 

in May 2018, and are keeping our 

We have set up a group to focus on 

take proper account of regulatory 

prices. With the recent creation of a 

partners and manufacturers as 

funds in the business for investment, 

preparedness for cyber threats under 

delivering efficiencies and process 

developments in the way we 

new Customer Director role, we are 

needed.

growth and de-leveraging. We 

review. We are also reviewing our 

improvements in our operations.

conduct our business. 

increasing our focus on the customer 

and have identified key strengths 

within our offering that will help 

develop our brand.

currently anticipate this strategy will 

future IT roadmap and have plans to 

be available to us over the medium 

upgrade our ERP and EPOS systems.

term. We will continue to work with 

our banking group to optimally 

manage our funding position.

 
 
 
 
 
 
Strategy

Supply chain

Supply chain transition

Competition

Customer Offer

Economy

Financial and treasury

Information Technology Operational cost base

Regulation

If the Board either adopts the wrong 

We rely on a small number of key 

During 2018, we will be transitioning 

We operate in a highly competitive 

strategy or does not implement it 

distributors and may be adversely 

the wholesale arrangements for 

environment, which is continually 

effectively the aims of the business, 

affected by changes in supplier 

the majority of our estate to a new 

changing and has been subject to 

its performance and reputation  

dynamics and interruptions in supply.

supplier. As with any significant 

consolidation. Failure to maintain 

may suffer.

project, there is a risk that it will not 

market share could have an adverse 

be delivered to plan.

effect on our core business and 

deflate sales and profitability.

Customer shopping habits are 
influenced by a wide range of 
factors. If we do not respond to their 
changing needs they are more likely 
to shop with a competitor and our 
reputation could suffer, resulting in 
falling revenues.

All our revenue is generated in 
the UK. Any deterioration in the 
UK economy, for example as a 
consequence of Brexit, could affect 
consumer spending and cost of 
goods, which in turn would impact 
our sales and profitability.

The main financial risks are the 
availability of short- and long-
term funding to meet business 
needs, fluctuations in interest rates, 
movements in energy prices and 
other post-Brexit impacts.

We depend on the reliability and 
capability of key information systems 
and technology. A major failure, a 
breach, or prolonged performance 
issues with store or head office 
systems could have an adverse 
impact on the business and its 
reputation.

We have a relatively high cost 
base, consisting primarily of salary, 
property rental and energy costs. 
Increases in these costs without a 
corresponding increase in revenues 
could adversely impact our 
profitability.

We operate in an environment 
governed by strict regulations to 
ensure the safety and protection of 
customers, colleagues, shareholders 
and other stakeholders. Regulations 
include alcohol licensing, 
employment, health and safety, 
data protection and the rules of the 
Stock Exchange. Failure to comply 
with relevant laws and regulations 
could result in sanctions and 
reputational damage.

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

•  Our strategic development is led 

•  We establish long-

by an experienced Board and 

term relationships with 

Senior Management 

trusted suppliers

•  There is close oversight 

by the Retail Board and 

Senior Management

•  An annual strategic review takes 

•  Our distribution partners 

•  We undertook a significant 

place alongside our budget-

maintain their own contingency 

amount of planning and testing 

our offer 

discussions with them to address 

•  We have a dedicated and 

setting process

planning as do we

•  The McColl’s strategy is widely 

•  We closely monitor supplier 

communicated and understood 

performance including 

across the business

service levels and hold regular 

•  Business plans are developed, 

monitored and reviewed 

against strategic KPIs

•  Senior Management are 

any issues

•  We monitor the financial stability 

of key partners

incentivised with performance-

•  We regularly review our supply 

related rewards to deliver our 

strategic goals

chain arrangements, with full 

tenders completed in 2013 

and 2017

work to identify and resolve 

potential issues and have 

instigated close monitoring of 

the rollout programme

skilled management team 

with extensive experience of 

managing supply arrangements

•  We have established clear lines 

of communication and a joint 

project management approach 

with our new supplier

•  Phased rollout is designed 

to ensure the transition is 

manageable and adapted 

where necessary

•  We monitor competitor activity 

and customer trends

•  Regular meetings are held 

with key suppliers to optimise 

•  Development of the Plus card 

loyalty scheme continues

•  We are increasing brand 

awareness through marketing 

•  Improvement of our estate and 

stores is ongoing 

•  Local refit programmes 

are undertaken to counter 

specific threats

Key strategic challenges for 2018 

Uncertainties in the market and the 

The transition project has been 

include successful transition to new 

planned transition to a new supplier 

carefully planned and tested. 

Our new supply arrangements, 

including the exclusive launch 

supply arrangements and significant 

increase the risk in the shorter term. 

Implementation is being closely 

of the Safeway brand and 

store refresh programme. Ongoing 

The recent collapse of Palmer & 

monitored and there is a clear route 

enhancement of our range, will 

change and consolidation in the 

Harvey tested our contingency 

to escalate any issues if required. 

bring competitive advantage. 

sector may also impact our business.

arrangements. The business is now 

The rollout plan is ambitious but is 

Our store refresh programme 

more reliant on its remaining legacy 

designed to ensure the team is not 

will enhance our customers’ 

supply partner whilst we transition to 

over-stretched.

shopping experience.

our new wholesale arrangements.

•  Membership of third party 
organisations (such as the 
Institute of Grocery Distribution 
and the Association of 
Convenience Stores) gives 
us greater insight into the 
convenience sector trends 
and developments

•  Our new Customer Director 

will enhance the Retail Board’s 
capability to address changing 
customer needs 

•  Promotional programmes offer 

customers great value

•  We have a customer loyalty 

scheme – Plus card

•  Our strong customer service 

standards are reflected in our 
evolving brand strategy

•  We complete detailed 

customer research for key 
projects, for example our store 
refurbishment programme

Our new supply arrangements will 
increase our access to a wider range 
of the excellent quality products that 
our customers want at competitive 
prices. With the recent creation of a 
new Customer Director role, we are 
increasing our focus on the customer 
and have identified key strengths 
within our offering that will help 
develop our brand.

•  We offer a wide range of 

products at different price points, 
e.g. value and premium brands

•  Our flexible business model 

allows us to respond to changes 
in customer behaviour, 
for example, by adapting 
our ranges

•  Our growing scale enables us 

to achieve better buying terms, 
helping to mitigate inflationary 
pressures and we are already 
working with our new supply 
partner to achieve this

•  We are growing our range of 
own brand products through  
the rollout of Safeway

Ongoing economic uncertainty 
increases the risk of a loss of 
consumer confidence. Further joint 
plans will be developed with supply 
partners and manufacturers as 
needed.

•  Funding requirements 
are managed through 
regular forecasting and 
treasury management

and business plans 

•  Relationships with lenders 
are managed through 
regular meetings

•  Our risks associated with 
financial instruments are 
disclosed in note 30 on page 122

•  We manage exposure to 

fluctuating energy prices by 
forward buying electricity. 
We acknowledge that the 
forward contracts in place are 
derivatives, they are treated as a 
pre-agreed price for electricity

We have commenced an annual 
programme of sale and leaseback 
of stores purchased as part of the 298 
store acquisition to release further 
funds in the business for investment, 
growth and de-leveraging. We 
currently anticipate this strategy will 
be available to us over the medium 
term. We will continue to work with 
our banking group to optimally 
manage our funding position.

•  We sell food and household 

•  Committed loan facilities are 

•  All business-critical systems 

essentials which are 
not considered to be 
highly discretionary

in place, which provide us with 
headroom to deliver our strategy 
(see notes 22 and 30)

•  The Board approves budgets 

•  Regular reviews assess our 

are well established and are 
supported by an appropriate 
disaster recovery strategy 
designed to ensure continuity  
of the business 

•  Business continuity plans are 
tested on an annual basis

vulnerability and our ability to 
re-establish operations in the 
event of a failure

•  Testing is performed to ensure 

data is controlled and protected

•  We continually seek to remove 
unnecessary complexity from 
our operational procedures to 
optimise performance

•  We operate a flexible staff model 

aligned to revenue levels

•  We have clear accountability 
for compliance with all laws 
and regulations

•  Our policies and procedures 
are designed to meet all 
relevant requirements

•  We monitor legislation and 

•  We train colleagues to comply 

with all relevant legislation

•  We have established 

governance groups, such as 
our Health and Safety Strategy 
Committee to review and 
manage our compliance

•  Through third party memberships 
and expert advice, we keep  
up-to-date with evolving statute

developments related to our 
costs, e.g. minimum wage, rents 
and energy tariffs, to allow us to 
plan and mitigate increases 

•  Property management is a key 
function with regular review 
processes in place

•  We minimise energy costs 
by combining energy 
efficiency initiatives and 
forward purchasing

•  We regularly retender external 

contracts to ensure they remain 
market-competitive

We are preparing for compliance 
with the General Data Protection 
Regulations, which come into effect 
in May 2018, and are keeping our 
preparedness for cyber threats under 
review. We are also reviewing our 
future IT roadmap and have plans to 
upgrade our ERP and EPOS systems.

National Living Wage and National 
Minimum Wage will again increase 
above the rate of inflation in 2018. 
We have set up a group to focus on 
delivering efficiencies and process 
improvements in our operations.

Regulations impacting our business 
continue to change but we have 
processes in place to make sure we 
take proper account of regulatory 
developments in the way we 
conduct our business. 

47

l

a

p

i

c

n

i

r

P

k

s

i

R

k

s

i

R

e

h

t

f

o

e

r

u

t

a

N

s

n

o

i

t

a

g

i

t

i

m

k

s

i

R

s

e

g

n

a

h

c

t

n

e

r

r

u

C

 
 
 
 
 
 
Chairman’s governance statement

Strong corporate 
governance

I am delighted to present my report on the corporate 
governance arrangements within McColl’s in my first  
year as Chairman. 

It has been a year of significant progress within the business 
as a whole and we have continued to strengthen our 
governance arrangements as well, to ensure that they 
remain proportionate and consistent with the principles 
of good governance enshrined within the UK Corporate 
Governance Code (the Code) and with the values that  
we defined during the year for the business. 

As the Code is further reviewed over the coming months, 
we will keep our Board arrangements under review and, 
in particular, will be looking at how we can improve the 
way we understand and take account of the views of our 
stakeholders, including colleagues, when making decisions. 

We will also be mindful of how we can do more to support 
and promote the McColl’s values: 

• Customer first

• Simple and consistent

• Caring and compassionate

• Community champions

As a Board it is important that we take the lead on 
incorporating these values into our work. 

I and my fellow Directors are fully committed to making sure 
governance and leadership of the business are sufficiently 
strong, effective and thoughtful to support the ongoing 
success of the business. It is in this context that we look 
forward to the continuing evolution of corporate governance 
within McColl’s as the business continues to develop 
and expand.

Angus Porter
Chairman

48  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

Compliance with the UK Corporate Governance Code

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Leadership

The Board is responsible for leading 
the business in the way which it 
believes is most likely to lead to 
long-term sustainable success.

Read more 
Pages 54 to 55

Effectiveness

Our practices aim to ensure we 
have a balanced Board comprised 
of committed, well-informed and 
appropriately skilled individuals to 
govern our business. 

Read more 
Pages 56 to 57

It is the opinion of the Board that the Company has been 
compliant with all the applicable provisions of the Code 
throughout the year with the exception of the following issue 
that was resolved part way through the year. The Code 
recommends that the Chairman should be independent 
upon appointment (Code A.3.1). James Lancaster, who had 
made an unparalleled contribution to the business over 
many years but who was not independent on appointment, 
stepped down as Non-Executive Chairman of the 
Company on 27 April 2017. As his successor, I was considered 
independent on appointment to the role of Chairman but, 
nevertheless, we acknowledge that we were not compliant 
with this Code provision for the entirety of the year.

Accountability

The Board defines McColl’s 
strategy, taking account of the 
need to avoid unnecessary 
or unacceptable risks. We are 
committed to transparency.

Read more 
Page 58

Corporate 
Governance

Remuneration

Our remuneration policy aims to 
incentivise strong performance 
whilst avoiding excess. We are 
also mindful of the pay of our 
colleagues across the business.

Read more 
Page 58

Relations with  
stakeholders

We have enhanced our investor 
relations activities and are looking 
at how to improve dialogue with 
other stakeholders, particularly our 
colleagues. 

Read more 
Page 59

49

Board of Directors

Strong  
leadership

Angus Porter
Non-Executive Chairman2 3

Jonathan Miller
Chief Executive3

Simon Fuller
Chief Financial Officer

Current appointment: Angus was appointed Non-
Executive Chairman on 27 April 2017, having formerly 
served as an Independent Non-Executive Director 
since 1 April 2016.

Key strengths: Angus has extensive knowledge 
and experience in strategy, innovation, and brand 
development as well as significant leadership skills. 

Experience: Angus has held numerous executive and 
non-executive roles across a range of industry sectors, 
including senior marketing and general management 
roles at Mars, BT, Abbey National and WPP. Recently, 
he was Chief Executive of the Professional Cricketers 
Association from 2010-2016, and Senior Independent 
Director and Chairman of the Remuneration 
Committee of Punch Taverns Plc. from 2012-2017. 

Other directorships: Angus is Co-Chairman of Direct 
Wines Ltd and a Non-Executive Director of TDC A/S.

Current appointment: Having joined the Group Board 
in 2004, Jonathan was appointed Chief Executive of 
McColl’s in 2016. He has worked in the Group since 
1991 when he was recruited as Financial Director of 
cigarette vending operations, becoming Finance 
Director of retail operations in 1998. Prior to his current 
role he was the Group’s Chief Financial Officer with 
additional responsibility for store development, human 
resources and IT.

Current appointment: Simon was appointed as 
the Group’s Chief Financial Officer in 2016 and has 
responsibility for finance, investor relations, property 
and IT. He joined McColl’s in 2015 as Deputy Chief 
Financial Officer. 

Key Strengths: With his deep understanding of 
financial management and the food retail industry, 
Simon plays a key role in delivery of the Group’s 
aspirations for change and growth.

Key Strengths: Jonathan’s ambitious vision for 
McColl’s is driving a transformational strategy for 
the business.

Experience: Through his long history with McColl’s, 
Jonathan has developed an in-depth understanding 
of both the business and the wider convenience 
retail market. He has had a major role in all of the key 
initiatives that have shaped the Group, including 
a secondary buyout in 2005, numerous corporate 
acquisitions and the IPO in 2014. As Chief Executive 
he led the transformational acquisition of 298 stores 
in 2016 and the negotiation in 2017 of the Group’s 
ground-breaking new wholesale arrangements.

Experience: Having previously worked in other public 
companies, Simon has applied his experience of 
operating within a listed environment to improve 
the Group’s financial and risk management 
processes and enhance investor relations and 
external communications. He put in place the 2016 
corporate refinancing required for the 298 store 
acquisition and has played a significant part in a 
number of re-tendering initiatives, most notably the 
advantageous new wholesale arrangements. 

50  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Dave Thomas
Chief Operating Officer

Georgina Harvey
Senior Independent Director1 2 3 

Current appointment: Dave was appointed as the 
Group’s Chief Operating Officer in 2014 but his history 
with McColl’s dates back to 1998 when he joined 
the business as Regional Manager for convenience. 
He became Operations General Manager in 2000 
and was made Operations Director in 2005.

Key Strengths: His long career rooted in the UK 
supermarket and convenience sector means Dave 
has extensive operational knowledge, enabling him 
to orchestrate a process of continual improvement 
and modernisation of the McColl’s offering across our 
growing estate.

Experience: Dave’s retail career began with Iceland 
where he led a programme of new store openings as 
well as conversion of Bejam stores. Subsequently he 
joined Southern Co-operative as Operations Manager, 
developing a modern convenience format for the 
business. More recently within McColl’s, he successfully 
managed the 2017 conversion of the 298 acquired 
stores to the McColl’s format as well as taking a key 
role in the negotiations and implementation of new 
supply arrangements.

Appointment: Georgina was appointed as an 
Independent Non-Executive Director on 7 February 
2014 and is Chairman of the Company’s Remuneration 
Committee. On 24 May 2016 Georgina was appointed 
as the Company’s Senior Independent Director.

Key Strengths: Georgina has significant experience 
across highly competitive consumer-facing markets 
and delivering successful transformational change.

Experience: Georgina started her media career at 
Express Newspapers plc where she was appointed 
Advertising Director in 1994. She joined IPC Media 
Limited in 1995 and went on to form IPC Advertising 
in 1998, where she was Managing Director. 
Between 2005 and 2012, Georgina was Managing 
Director, regionals division and a member of the 
Executive Committee of Trinity Mirror.

Other directorships: Georgina is also an Independent 
Non-Executive Director of William Hill PLC and Big 
Yellow Group PLC.

Sharon Brown
Independent Non-Executive 
Director1 2 3

Jens Hofma
Independent Non-Executive 
Director1 2 3

Appointment: Sharon was appointed as an 
Independent Non-Executive Director on 7 February 
2014 and is Chairman of the Company’s Audit & Risk 
Committee. Sharon previously served as the Group’s 
Interim Chairman.

Key strengths: Sharon has deep knowledge of 
finance and audit-related matters, combined with 
over 25 years’ experience in the retail sector. 

Experience: Sharon is a management accountant 
and has extensive financial experience, gained whilst 
Finance Director and Company Secretary of Dobbies 
Garden Centres Limited between 1998 and 2013. 
She also held a senior financial position within the 
retail division of John Menzies plc from 1991 to 1998. 
She is, and has been, Audit Committee Chairman 
for a number of companies.

Other directorships: Sharon is a Non-Executive 
Director and Audit Committee Chairman of 
Fidelity Special Values PLC, F&C Capital and 
Income Investment Trust plc, and Celtic plc and 
is a Non-Executive Director of a number of limited 
companies in the retail sector.

Appointment: Jens was appointed as an 
Independent Non-Executive Director on 1 July 2017. 

Key strengths: Jens has particular expertise in 
consumer goods as well as the restaurant and food-
to-go industry. He also possesses in-depth experience 
of growing multi-site businesses.

Experience: Jens is Chief Executive Officer of Pizza Hut 
Restaurants in the UK. He joined the Pizza Hut business 
in February 2009 and has since led a private equity 
funded buyout of its dine-in restaurants. Prior to his 
involvement with Pizza Hut, Jens spent five years with 
Yum! Brands, working in the UK and in Europe. He has 
also previously worked for Nestlé and McKinsey in 
various European countries.

Other directorships: Jens is Chief Executive Officer 
of Pizza Hut (UK) Limited.

1  Member of the Audit & Risk Committee.

2  Member of the Remuneration Committee.

3  Member of the Nomination Committee.

51

Retail Board
Retail Board

Jonathan Miller
Chief Executive

Simon Fuller
Chief Financial Officer

Dave Thomas
Chief Operating Officer 

Read more on page 50.

Read more on page 50.

Read more on page 51.

The Group’s Retail Board, comprises the Executive Directors 
and the most senior Managers within the business. The 
Retail Board is collectively responsible for supporting the 
Chief Executive in delivering the Group’s strategic objectives.

Neil Hodge
Information 
Technology Director

Current appointment: Neil was appointed 
Information Technology Director in 2011 
but has worked for the Group since 
1993, initially as Field Support Manager 
and then, from 1997, as Information 
Technology Manager. 

Experience: As well as ensuring the day-
to-day IT and data needs of the Group 
are well serviced, Neil plays a key role in 
the planning and delivery of numerous 
strategic initiatives across the business, the 
majority of which are technology-enabled. 
Before joining McColl’s, Neil worked at 
Dexham Shops and Royal Doulton.

Steve Green
Retail Finance Director 

Current appointment: Steve joined 
McColl’s as Retail Finance Director 
in May 2016.

Experience: Since joining McColl’s, 
Steve has restructured the finance team, 
improved controls, and delivered financial 
support to all of the business’s major 
initiatives. Before joining McColl’s, Steve 
was the Group Financial Controller for 
Tesco’s Malaysian business. In total, Steve 
was with Tesco for 14 years, both in the UK 
and overseas.

52  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Steve Goswell
Operations Director 

Karen Bird
Colleague Director 

David Archibald
Development Director 

Peter Miller
Trading Director 

Tim Fairs
Customer Director 

Current appointment: Steve joined 
McColl’s as Operations Director in 
September 2016.

Current appointment: Karen joined 
McColl’s as Colleague Director in 
October 2016.

Experience: Steve’s first full year in our 
business has seen the successful integration 
of 298 Co-op stores into the McColl’s 
estate, alongside the deployment of 
the operational business improvement 
programme, which is primarily focused 
on improving the customer shopping trip 
and realising efficiency opportunities. 
Before joining McColl’s, Steve had spent the 
majority of his career with Tesco, holding 
a number of senior positions including 
Transformation Director and Regional 
Store Director.

Experience: Since joining the business, 
Karen has restructured the HR team, 
focusing on the key processes and priorities 
to strengthen the function. In the last year, 
Karen has developed a strategic colleague 
plan for the business, and has begun work 
on capability, performance and talent 
development. Karen was previously People 
Director at Tesco, where she worked in 
both HR and Operational roles, including 
leading change programmes on culture 
and service.

Current appointment: David was 
appointed Development Director in 2006 
having joined the Group in 1993.

Experience: Responsible for our 
acquisitions and estate management, 
David has been instrumental in ensuring 
conversion of the 298 stores to the McColl’s 
format proceeded to plan and is also 
playing a key role in our programme of 
shop refresh activity to deliver significant 
benefits from store modernisation. 
Previously David worked at Independent 
Stores, Fine Fare, Asda, Victoria Wine and 
the Ministry of Defence.

Current appointment: Peter was 
appointed Trading Director in 2015, having 
originally joined McColl’s as Buying Director 
in 2011.

Experience: Peter has a wealth of grocery 
sector experience, ensuring McColl’s 
trading performance is supported through 
effective and competitive supplier 
relationships. Before joining McColl’s, Peter 
was Group Trading Director at SPAR UK 
Ltd. Prior to this, Peter worked as Director 
of Trading at Big Food Group and Group 
Buying Director at Booker PLC.

Current appointment: Tim joined McColl’s 
as our Customer Director in January 2018.

Experience: Tim will develop the customer 
agenda, a key pillar of our strategy, by 
helping to define our brand proposition and 
bringing the McColl’s brand to life as well 
as establishing effective relationships with 
our customers after they have left the store. 
Tim is passionate about customers and 
has extensive relevant experience, most 
recently as VP Marketing and E-Commerce 
at Clintons, and prior to that as Head of 
Marketing at Dixons Carphone where he 
launched the service brand KNOWHOW.

53

Corporate governance report

The following sections describe how the Board applies 
the principles of the UK Corporate Governance Code 
(the Code) and the extent to which we comply with the 
Code’s provisions.

Leadership

McColl’s is headed by an effective Board which is responsible 
for delivering long-term success in the business

During the year, there have been a number of changes to 
the Board to ensure that the Board is sufficiently independent, 
challenging and experienced to lead this growing and 
ambitious business. 

James Lancaster stepped down as Chairman in April 2017 
and I was honoured to be appointed as his successor. 
On appointment, I met the independence requirements set 
out in the Code. 

In July we appointed a new Independent Non-Executive 
Director, Jens Hofma. His experience in growing a consumer 
brand, including refurbishment of a multi-site estate, and 
knowledge of the food-to-go market, complement the 
attributes, backgrounds and know-how of the existing Board 
members and considerably enhance our collective skillset. 
Despite being new to our business, Jens has already made 
a strong contribution to our Board discussions. 

In October, James Lancaster, who has been such a 
significant contributor to the McColl’s business, stepped 
down from the Board. Following a review by the Nomination 
Committee, it was decided that there was no need to seek 
a replacement for James at this time.

As a result of these changes, three of our Non-Executive 
Directors, being half of the Board (excluding myself as 
Chairman), meet the independence requirements of the 
Code and accordingly the Board now fully complies with 
the higher standard of Board independence expected 
of FTSE 350 companies.

Notwithstanding the changes that have been made 
amongst the Non-Executive Directors, we have 
benefited from a period of stability in our Executive team. 
Under Jonathan Miller’s leadership, the business has had 
a transformative year. Jonathan receives outstanding 
support from his fellow Executives, Dave Thomas (Chief 
Operating Officer) and Simon Fuller (Chief Financial Officer). 
Together the Executive team is ambitious in its vision, 
responsible in its management, cohesive in its leadership  
and effective in its delivery. 

The matters covered by the schedule are listed below. 
The schedule is periodically reviewed. 

1.  Strategy and values

2.  Annual budget and business performance

3.   Major acquisitions and disposals and new 

business developments

4.  Risk appetite, risk management and internal controls 

5.  Shareholder communications

6.  Share capital changes, borrowings and treasury policy

7. 

 Dividend payments and recommendations

8.  Group entity structure

9.  Board and other senior appointments

10. Corporate governance matters and delegations

The responsibilities of the Board and the Executive are clearly 
defined and no individual has unfettered powers of decision 

11.  Group policies

12. Pensions and other legal matters

The Chief Executive is responsible for delivering the Group’s 
strategy and for its operational performance. The Chief 
Executive is supported in carrying out his responsibilities by 
the Chief Financial Officer and Chief Operating Officer. 

These responsibilities are defined as part of a scheme 
of delegation established by the Board. The scheme of 
delegation is one element of the controls by which the Board 
seeks to ensure that risk is adequately and appropriately 
managed within the business. 

The starting point for those delegations is the schedule of 
matters reserved for the Board. This schedule sets out those 
decisions which will not be delegated to any other group or 
individual but will always require Board sign off. 

Matters that are not reserved to the Board may be 
delegated, for example, by:

•  terms of reference to a committee;
•  role description to an individual;
•  policies and procedures to colleagues within certain 

functions or of a certain grade; or 

•  contract to external parties.

The Group also has a Retail Board, comprising the Executive 
Directors and the most senior Managers within the business. 
The Retail Board is collectively responsible for supporting the 
Chief Executive in delivering the Group’s strategic objectives. 
Biographical details for the Retail Board members are 
provided on pages 52 to 53. 

54  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

The Retail Board is supported by other specific operational 
committees within the business which help ensure that 
strategic actions are disseminated and managed, that 
progress and issues are appropriately reported and 
escalated and that management are properly accountable 
for the performance of their areas of responsibility.

Further details of the different roles performed by the Chief 
Executive and the Chairman are provided on the Group’s 
website www.mccollsplc.co.uk/leadership.

As Chairman, I am responsible for leadership of the Board 
and ensuring the Board is effective in all aspects of its role

Specific roles have been delegated to me, as Chairman. 
I am responsible for the operation of the Board and for 
leading the Group’s governance. This includes setting the 
Board agenda and leading the Board’s discussions and 
decision-making. In addition, my role is to actively promote a 
culture of openness and debate by facilitating the effective 
contribution of the Independent Non-Executive Directors. 
I am available to discuss matters with shareholders and am 
responsible for ensuring that the Board is kept well informed 
about shareholder views. In order to assess the effectiveness 
of the Board and Committees, I lead the annual evaluation 
process. Further details of the Board evaluation are provided 
on page 57. My own performance as Chairman is appraised 
by the Non-Executives who, led by the Senior Independent 
Director, meet in my absence annually to discuss this.

Our Non-Executive Directors constructively challenge and 
help develop McColl’s strategy

Our shareholders have entrusted the Board with promoting 
the long-term success of the Company, whilst remaining 
true to the culture and values that we have set for the 
organisation. The Board does this by establishing a range of 
short and long-term objectives, monitoring and challenging 
progress made towards attaining them and incentivising 
behaviours that are likely to result in sustainable achievement 
of our vision for the business. All of this must be achieved 
without adopting an inappropriate approach to risk and risk 
management that could jeopardise enterprise value. 

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

The Non-Executive Directors are key to this process, providing 
feedback based on their different backgrounds, experience 
and skills and with the benefit of having a degree of 
distance from the process by which initial proposals are 
developed. Active and robust debate of proposals with the 
Non-Executive Directors enables new perspectives to be 
considered and ensures that the ambitions and actions of 
management are subject to challenging oversight.

The Board sets the strategic direction of the Group, taking 
account of factors such as the external environment and 
trends, the resources and existing challenges of the business, 
opportunities and risks. The Board takes time annually to 
review existing strategy and to refresh the agreed approach, 

priorities and expectations. To inform and provide context 
for its consideration and debate of management’s 
strategic proposals, the Board receives relevant reports 
and background presentations from both internal and 
external parties. 

Having set the strategic priorities, the Board monitors and 
incentivises delivery of these objectives (whether short- or 
long-term) on a continual basis, regularly reviewing the 
controls and resources that are in place, the risks faced 
by the business and how those risks are managed.

Separate reports by the Board’s three main Committees – 
the Audit & Risk Committee, Remuneration Committee and 
Nomination Committee – are provided on pages 60 to 85. 

Working together to ensure strong governance
Our experienced Executive team are supported and challenged by the 
Non-Executive Directors who bring a range of different backgrounds and 
perspectives to boardroom discussions and decision-making.

55

Our Board recruitment processes are formal, 
rigorous and transparent

Our Directors should dedicate sufficient time 
to their responsibilities

Corporate governance report continued

Effectiveness

The McColl’s Board has a strong balance of skills, experience, 
independence and knowledge of the business

Last year we recognised that the independence of the Board 
and its Committees were not fully meeting the expectations 
of investors. We have therefore made changes to the 
Board’s composition, and of its Committees, to address that 
issue. In doing so, we have also been able to enhance the 
collective skills, experience and knowledge of the Board and 
believe that these changes will therefore significantly benefit 
the business. Details of the experience, background and skills 
of individual Directors can be found on pages 50 to 51.

Diversity in all its forms is something that the Board welcomes. 
Ultimately diversity brings different perspectives to our 
debates and ensures that, as a Board, we are considering 
matters from a variety of different aspects. In particular, the 
balance of skills, experience and qualifications of the Board 
and its Committees and the mix of different backgrounds 
is of great importance to the effectiveness of our strategic 
leadership and our governance arrangements.

Our policy is not to set a quota or target for Board diversity 
but we are fully committed to transparent and robust 
practices to identify the individual best suited to any 
vacancy. Recruitment is based on an assessment of the 
skills, experience, qualifications and other attributes sought 
and we support this principle being applied throughout 
the organisation. Further details of our approach to issues 
of diversity and, in particular, support for women within the 
business, can be found within the Nomination Committee 
report on page 62 and in relation to our wider organisation, 
on page 40.

For our Board recruitment activity during the year, we 
engaged an external firm to help ensure we searched a wide 
pool of potential candidates and assessed them against 
objective criteria in order to identify someone with the 
appropriate skills. Further details about this process, which 
was led by our Nomination Committee, are provided on 
page 61.

Attendance at meetings

Angus Porter1
Jonathan Miller
Simon Fuller
Dave Thomas
Georgina Harvey
Sharon Brown
Jens Hofma2
James Lancaster3

Board

Audit & Risk

Remuneration

Nomination

9/9
9/9
9/9
9/9
8/9
9/9
6/6
5/8

1/1
–
–
–
4/4
4/4
3/3
–

3/3
–
–
–
3/3
3/3
2/2
–

3/3
3/3
–
–
3/3
3/3
1/1
2/2

1  Angus Porter ceased to be a member of the Audit & Risk Committee on 1 July 2017.

2  Jens Hofma was appointed an Independent Non-Executive Director and member of the Audit & Risk, Remuneration and Nomination Committees on 1 July 2017.

3  James Lancaster resigned as a Non-Executive Director and member of the Nomination Committee on 3 October 2017.

56  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

The commitment of our Directors to their roles, including 
the time commitment of our Non-Executive Directors, is a 
crucial factor in ensuring that our skilled Board is able to lead 
the business effectively to build sustainable value for our 
shareholders. Non-Executive Directors’ letters of appointment 
define their duties and, taking account of these, the 
Nomination Committee has reviewed the time commitment 
required of our Non-Executive Directors. Further details 
regarding this can be found on pages 61 to 62. 

The number of meetings attended by our Directors does not 
fully reflect their involvement in the business as, between 
meetings, they are regularly involved in other activities. 
Such activities include meetings with management and 
external advisers, shareholder dialogue and background 
reading. However, meeting attendance statistics, set out 
in the table on this page, can provide an indication of the 
degree of commitment.

New Directors receive a formal induction and ongoing 
development activities apply to the whole Board

The talents of our Board members can be put to best use 
when we ensure that they are properly informed. All Directors 
need to be kept up to date about the business including 
trends and developments in the market, changes in the 
regulatory environment and other factors. 

This need particularly arises on appointment and, 
accordingly, all new Directors undergo a formal induction 
process that is described on page 62. However, Directors also 
need ongoing development in order to perform their duties 
as well as possible. As a Board we recognise this ongoing 
requirement and seek to identify and address these needs 
through a variety of individual and group activities such as in-
depth board briefings, store and site visits and presentations 
by external advisers.

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

All Directors are subject to annual re-election

The re-election of the Directors is considered annually by 
the Nomination Committee in advance of the Company’s 
Annual General Meeting. A recommendation for re-election 
is not automatic but is dependent upon the Nomination 
Committee being satisfied that the contribution of each 
Director warrants being proposed. 

For the Annual General Meeting to be held on 12 April 2018, 
following an assessment of individual performance, all 
Directors are unanimously recommended by the Board for 
re-appointment. Biographical details for the Directors are 
provided on pages 50 and 51 and further details accompany 
the notice of Annual General Meeting, including the reasons 
the proposed re-election of each Director has been agreed 
by the Board.

Arrangements are in place to provide Directors with good 
quality information in a timely manner

An externally facilitated Board evaluation has 
been conducted

Directors, and in particular Non-Executive Directors who 
are not involved in the business on a day-to-day basis, must 
receive high quality, relevant information in a timely manner 
if they are to be able to make appropriate decisions for the 
business. Meeting agendas need to prioritise salient matters 
and ensure that the Board is considering the right issues at 
appropriate times. Reports must be thorough so that Directors 
arrive at meetings well briefed and ready to dedicate the 
valuable time we have together to challenging and testing 
rationales, risks and alternatives, for example, as opposed to 
seeking background information and facts that could readily 
have been addressed in the original papers. The Company 
Secretary plays a key role at McColl’s in ensuring that this is 
the case. 

The Directors of any business can face difficult issues from 
time to time and it is important that they always feel they 
are able to address those issues with the appropriate 
knowledge and advice at their disposal. Accordingly, all 
Directors, having notified the Chairman in the first instance, 
are able to take independent professional advice at the 
Company’s expense if they feel such advice is necessary 
in the furtherance of their duties. During 2017, no Director 
felt it necessary to take such individual advice. They also 
have access to the advice and services of the Company 
Secretary, who is responsible for advising the Board, through 
the Chairman, on all governance matters, and who is also 
available to any Director who wishes to seek her counsel.

There are many aspects that can influence a Board’s 
effectiveness and, using the services of Deloitte, a full Board 
evaluation process was conducted. The externally-facilitated 
process illustrated below was completed during 2017. 

Whilst the evaluation concluded that the Board was 
effective, a number of actions were identified from that work 
which we believe will result in an even more effective Board. 
These include a greater focus on succession planning and 
talent management and the need to have an even longer 
term view on strategy. 

The Board agreed that the next evaluation should be carried 
out internally on the basis of individual discussions between 
myself and each Director. Those discussions took place 
towards the end of 2017.

The feedback from those discussions was discussed by 
the Board during the early part of 2018 in order to assess 
progress since the last evaluation and to identify any further 
enhancements that can be made.

In particular the Board concluded that it wished to develop 
and enhance the opportunities available to Non-Executive 
Directors to engage with colleagues. We will be looking for 
a range of ways in which we can listen to and learn from the 
people who make McColl’s a success.

Board evaluation process

Externally facilitated

Internally facilitated

Completion of  
questionnaire

Collation  
and reporting 
of results

Discussion of 
findings and 
agreement of 
action plan

Individual 
discussions 
with Chairman

Reporting 
of feedback

Discussion of 
findings and 
update of 
action plan

57

Corporate governance report continued

Accountability

Our Board is responsible for determining the principal risks 
that it considers to be acceptable in order to achieve 
McColl’s strategic objectives

Remuneration

The McColl’s Board recognises its duty to present a fair, 
balanced and understandable assessment of the Group’s 
position and prospects

The Annual Report and Accounts, together with other 
published information, provide important disclosures 
that enable shareholders and other readers to assess the 
performance, strategy and business model of the Company. 
The Group has thorough assurance processes in place in 
respect of the preparation, verification and approval of 
periodic financial reports, including:

•  a system of financial and other internal controls,

• 

the involvement of qualified, professional employees 
with an appropriate level of experience (both in our 
finance team and throughout the business),

•  a transparent process to ensure full disclosure 

of information to the external Auditor,

•  access to external help and advice on highly 

technical subjects,

•  comprehensive review and, where appropriate, 

challenge from appropriate senior managers and 
Executive Directors,

•  oversight by the Audit & Risk Committee as described in 

more detail on pages 63 to 67.

These processes provide reasonable assurance to the Board 
when they approve the Annual Report and Accounts and 
other published documents that the disclosures they contain, 
including the viability and going concern statements, are not 
misleading and are sufficient for users of those documents to 
form a reasonable view of the business and its prospects. 

The Board recognises that effective risk management is 
essential to the long-term success of the business and to 
protecting shareholder value. It has overall responsibility for 
the Group’s system of risk management and internal controls 
and for ensuring those systems are effective. Although no 
system can provide absolute assurance, our systems are 
considered adequate to appropriately manage the risk 
of failure to achieve business objectives and to provide 
reasonable protection from material misstatement or loss. 

The McColl’s approach to risk and risk management is 
described on pages 44 to 47 where a summary of our key risks 
and how they are mitigated is also provided. These principal 
risks have been agreed following robust and regular 
assessment. They include the risks that could threaten our 
business model, performance, solvency or liquidity.

Our Board has established formal and transparent 
arrangements for considering how corporate reporting, 
risk management and internal control principles should 
be applied and how an appropriate relationship with 
the external Auditor can be maintained

The Board has established an Audit & Risk Committee 
comprising Independent Non-Executive Directors, including 
individuals who have experience relevant to the retail sector. 
This Committee is chaired by Sharon Brown, who has recent 
and relevant financial experience, and who has provided a 
separate report on behalf of the Audit & Risk Committee on 
pages 63 to 67. 

The Audit & Risk Committee Report describes the 
membership, responsibilities and activities of the Committee 
and how it has discharged its duties during the year.

Our approach to Executive Directors’ remuneration 
is designed to promote the long-term success of the business

The Directors’ Remuneration Report on pages 68 to 85 
describes in detail our approach to Executive Directors’ 
remuneration, the different elements that make up their 
remuneration package, the targets on which performance 
elements are based, and termination arrangements. One of 
the key factors of which the Remuneration Committee 
takes account when it is considering potential changes 
to Executive remuneration, is the pay and conditions that 
prevail across the wider group.

Non-Executive Directors are paid a fee that reflects the time 
commitment required of them and their responsibilities. 
The Nomination Committee has recommended an increase 
in the time commitment expected of the Chairmen of 
the Audit & Risk and Remuneration Committees and, 
in recognition of that, the annual fee for chairing those 
committees has been increased from £5,000 to £8,000. Non-
Executive Directors do not receive any performance-related 
benefits and no increase to other elements of the Non-
Executive fee arrangements have been made.

There is a formal and transparent procedure for 
developing Executive remuneration and for determining 
individual packages

The Remuneration Committee, comprised wholly of 
Independent Non-Executive Directors, is responsible for 
setting our Executive team’s remuneration, including 
performance conditions, and for determining the extent 
to which relevant targets have been met. It consults with 
shareholders, in particular when changes are proposed, and 
has done so recently in respect of the remuneration policy 
that is submitted for shareholder approval at the Annual 
General Meeting to be held on 12 April 2018.

The Remuneration Report on pages 68 to 85 describes in 
more detail how the Remuneration Committee discharges 
these duties.

58  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Engaging with 
Stakeholders

The McColl’s Board has responsibility for ensuring that 
dialogue with shareholders and other stakeholders is active 
and based on a mutual understanding of objectives

This year McColl’s has considerably enhanced its investor 
relations activities. The programme has included individual 
meetings with investors, investor presentations, store visits and 
a capital markets day. The Board receives regular reports 
on the investor relations programme and, as part of this, 
shareholder views are fed back to the Board. 

Specific consultations are undertaken from time to time 
with our major shareholders. The most recent of these 
was undertaken in relation to proposed changes to our 
remuneration policy. 

The Board is also conscious that the views and interests 
of other stakeholders in the business are important. 
Engaging with those other stakeholders is an aspect which 
the Board recognises could be improved. In particular we are 
looking at how we can enhance the Board’s engagement 
with colleagues across the business.

McColl’s general meetings are used to encourage investor 
communication and participation

The McColl’s Board recognises that our shareholders are a 
key group of stakeholders in the business and their views and 
engagement are important. The Annual General Meeting 
provides an essential opportunity for shareholders to meet 
directly with our Directors and, in particular, the Chairmen of 
our Committees. We publicise the outcome of proxy votes 
received in advance of general meetings. 

Shareholders who wish to raise issues with the Company may 
contact us via email investor.relations@mccolls.co.uk.

Approved by the Board and signed on its behalf:

Angus Porter
Non-Executive Chairman

Investor Day
In 2017 we commissioned IGD (Institute of Grocery Distribution) to conduct 
some research on how convenience shoppers value time, and in May we 
hosted an event for investors and city analysts where we presented the 
results. We also provided an update on our strategic plans.

59

Nomination Committee report

“ Our balance of skills, experience, 

qualifications and diversity remains 
appropriate to the strategic ambitions 
of the business.”

Angus Porter
Nomination Committee Chairman

Dear Shareholder
On behalf of the Nomination Committee, I am pleased to 
present our report for 2017.

Attendance at Nomination Committee meetings during the 
year is indicated in the table below. Three meetings were 
held during the year.

Meeting 
attendance

During the year, a key focus was the recruitment of an 
additional Independent Non-Executive Director. Our search 
prioritised the skills and attributes identified as likely to 
enhance the Board’s ability to shape and deliver the Group’s 
strategy for growth, as well as to improve the independent 
nature of the Board and its Committees. As reported below, 
after conducting an external search, we were delighted to 
recommend the appointment of Jens Hofma.

Committee composition and effectiveness
Following James Lancaster’s resignation from the Board, the 
Nomination Committee now comprises myself as Chairman, 
together with three Independent Non-Executive Directors 
and the Chief Executive. The Committee is actively 
supported by the Company Secretary.

As part of the Board’s externally-facilitated performance 
evaluation which concluded during the year, the Nomination 
Committee also reviewed its own performance. The results 
of this exercise will continue to shape the future activities of 
the Committee. 

Angus Porter
Nomination Committee Chairman since 27 April 2017
Chairman of the Board (considered independent  
on appointment)

Sharon Brown 
Nomination Committee Member
Independent Non-Executive Director

Georgina Harvey
Nomination Committee Member
Senior Independent Director

Jens Hofma
Nomination Committee Member since 1 July 2017
Independent Non-Executive Director

James Lancaster
Nomination Committee Chairman until 27 April 2017 
and Committee member until 3 October 2017

Jonathan Miller
Chief Executive

60  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

The Nomination Committee’s responsibilities 
and activities
The Nomination Committee’s responsibilities, which are set 
out in full in the Committee’s terms of reference (available 
from www.mccollsplc.co.uk/committees), and the activities 
through which the Committee has discharged those 
responsibilities, are explored in more detail below.

As well as reviewing its terms of reference during the year, the 
Committee also considered its performance and reviewed 
the outcomes of the Board evaluation process as a whole. 
The performance evaluation was conducted by Deloitte and 
its findings informed a number of aspects of the Committee’s 
work during the year. A further internal Board evaluation has 
been carried out, which is described on page 57.

The key matters considered at each of the Committee’s 
meetings during the year are summarised in the 
following table.

Composition of the Board and its Committees
This year has been another year of change for the Board. 
The composition of our Board is now fully compliant with the 
Code’s higher standard of independence requirements that 
apply to FTSE 350 companies. 

Our previous Chairman, James Lancaster, stepped aside 
from that role at our Annual General Meeting in April 2017 
although he remained a Non-Executive Director until his 
resignation on 3 October 2017. Following discussions and 
consideration by the Nomination Committee conducted  
in my absence, and based upon a written role description,  
I was appointed James’ successor as Chairman of the Board.

The Committee also led the search and selection of an 
additional Independent Non-Executive Director, Jens Hofma, 
and was assisted in this recruitment by external consultancy, 
Inzito Partnership. Inzito Partnership has no other connection 
with the business and is accredited under the Women 
on Boards’ Enhanced Code of Conduct for Executive 
Search Firms. 

Finally, the Nomination Committee also reviewed the 
composition of the Board following James Lancaster’s 
resignation from the Board in October and concluded that, 
at this time, no recommendation would be made to the 
Board for recruitment of an additional Non-Executive Director 
to replace him. 

As part of these activities, which might be described as 
the central functions of the Nomination Committee, the 
Committee reviewed the composition of the Board and its 
Committees to provide assurance that our balance of skills, 
experience, qualifications and diversity remains appropriate 
to the strategic ambitions of the business and the challenges 
it faces. In particular, in making the recommendation 
to appoint Jens Hofma, the Committee took account 
of his expertise in consumer goods and the food service 
industry as well as his in-depth experience of growing 
multi-site businesses.

Our Non-Executive Directors’ key skills

Meeting date

Key agenda items

Feb

Apr

Nov

•  review of Non-Executive Directors independence
•  consideration of suitability of Directors for re-election at the Annual General Meeting
•  search and selection of new Non-Executive Director
•  recommendation on appointment of Chairman of the Board
•  performance evaluation

•  recommendation on appointment of Non-Executive Director
•  review of Board Committee composition

2

2

3

Areas of
Experience

4

2

2

•  review of Directors’ conflict of interest authorisations
•  review of Non-Executive Directors’ time commitment
•  review of Nomination Committee terms of reference
•  agreement on future focus on succession planning and talent
•  review of the balance of the Board

Finance
Strategy

Operations
Retail

Multi-site business
Consumer brands

Independence, interests and commitment
The Committee is responsible for reviewing, at least 
annually, the independence of Board members, Directors’ 
potential conflicts of interest, the re-election of Directors at 
the Company’s Annual General Meeting and Directors’ 
time commitment. 

61

Nomination Committee report continued

The time commitments required of Non-Executive Directors 
are set out in their letters of engagement and are 25-30 
days per year for the Chairman and 15-20 days per year 
for other Non-Executive Directors. Following review by 
the Nomination Committee, it has been recognised that 
these time commitments are not sufficient to enable the 
Chairmen of the Audit & Risk and Remuneration Committees 
to fully perform those roles in addition to their other duties. 
Accordingly, it has been decided to increase the required 
time commitment for those individuals by an extra five 
days per annum. Reflecting this change, the annual fees 
that are paid for chairing the Audit & Risk or Remuneration 
Committee have been increased from £5,000 to £8,000.

The Committee reviewed all Directors’ interests and 
concluded that conflicts of interest have been appropriately 
disclosed and authorised. Following the Committee’s 
recommendations on these matters, the Board has 
confirmed that it considers all Non-Executive Directors  
to be independent and has proposed all Directors for  
re-election at the Company’s Annual General Meeting  
to be held on 12 April 2018. 

Induction and Board development
As part of the Board and Committee externally-facilitated 
evaluation exercise concluded during the year, the 
effectiveness of existing induction and development activities 
was assessed and found to be adequate.

Board Diversity

Upon recruitment, Jens Hofma commenced a formal 
induction process that has involved providing him with 
background information about the business and its 
regulatory environment through, for example, the sharing of 
reports and governance documents. Face-to-face meetings 
were arranged with other Directors, key personnel within the 
business and its advisers and site visits were undertaken.

The ongoing development of Board members is also a priority 
and regular in-depth reviews are undertaken to ensure that 
the Non-Executive Directors have a full understanding of the 
business, specific functional strategies and projects, changes 
to the regulatory environment and market developments. 
Additional development activities are planned over the 
coming months including various site visits, attendance at 
our annual conference and an update on the evolving 
governance landscape for listed businesses.

Succession planning, talent management and diversity
Feedback from the last Board and Committee evaluation 
indicated that the Board and Nomination Committee’s 
visibility of, and input to, succession planning and talent 
management processes could be improved. The Board 
received a presentation on the Group’s colleague plan 
during the year which addressed a number of relevant issues 
including succession within the business, the identification 
and nurturing of talent, and the diversity and inclusion 

2

Gender
Diversity

Executive
vs
Independent

4

3

agenda. The Committee has determined that these are 
areas on which there should be some additional focus 
during 2018. 

The Board and Nomination Committee are committed 
to ensuring that inclusion and diversity, including gender 
diversity, are fully supported at Board level and throughout 
the business. We recognise that an organisation that 
embraces difference will benefit from the range of 
perspectives brought by variety of background and other 
influences. Accordingly, all appointments are based upon 
an assessment of the skills, qualifications and experience of 
individuals. It is not the Board’s policy to establish a quota of 
women for appointment.

A number of wider initiatives have been established within 
the business during the year to ensure that we support 
our colleagues to achieve their aspirations and potential. 
Some of these are aimed at ensuring that we provide good 
support to women, whatever stage they are at in their life 
and career, to succeed in the workplace. More detail about 
our colleague engagement and initiatives and plans to 
support and develop colleagues can be found on pages  
39 to 41.

As a business, McColl’s is a significant employer of women. 
Like many other organisations, at McColl’s women are under-
represented at senior management levels but it is good news 
that more than half our stores are managed by women. 
A focus group was run to learn from the real experiences 
of our female colleagues, and we have been analysing 
the data gathered for our gender pay gap reporting to 
understand better where efforts need to be more focused. 

Details of our gender pay gap are provided on page 41.

This report was approved by the Nomination Committee and 
signed on its behalf:

5

Female
Male

Executive
Independent Non-Executive*

*  The Chairman was deemed 

independent on appointment.

Angus Porter
Nomination Committee Chairman

62  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

Audit & Risk Committee report

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

“ We recognise that a culture that 
encourages high standards of 
conduct will reduce the risk of 
wrong-doing within the business.”

Sharon Brown
Audit & Risk Committee Chairman

Dear Shareholder
I am pleased to present the Audit & Risk Committee’s 
formal report.

Developments in the business this year have continued 
apace and our strategy for the future remains ambitious 
(see page 20 in the Strategic Report). Whilst our plans for the 
business are exciting, we must remain particularly mindful 
of the risks and pitfalls that a fast-developing business 
can face and ensure that controls are sufficiently robust 
and that behaviours are appropriate. During the year, the 
Committee’s remit for risk oversight was extended following a 
review of its terms of reference. To reflect this the Committee 
was renamed the ‘Audit & Risk Committee’.

The Audit & Risk Committee leads the Board’s focus on 
matters of risk, as well as on integrity of the Group’s financial 
reporting, and has been busy during the year in ensuring that 
we discharge our responsibilities carefully. The Committee’s 
report which follows provides information on how we have 
done so.

McColl’s is a business which has long prided itself on the 
valuable role it plays within the neighbourhoods we serve. 
Our colleagues, whether in store or behind the scenes, care 
about the business, our customers and the community. 
During the year, four new corporate values (see page 14)
which capture these great qualities were endorsed by 
the Board. 

We recognise that a culture that encourages high standards 
of conduct will reduce the risk of wrong-doing within the 
business. The Audit & Risk Committee has therefore been 
pleased to help the active implementation of these new 
corporate values by supporting their inclusion in some 
key policies which govern the way in which McColl’s 
does business. 

The make up of the Audit & Risk Committee and the skills we 
collectively bring to our work, the ways in which we have 
performed our role, the key matters that we have considered 
and the recommendations that we have made to the Board 
are described in the remainder of this report. 

Sharon Brown
Audit & Risk Committee Chairman

63

Audit & Risk Committee report continued

Committee composition and effectiveness 
The balance of skills, knowledge and experience of 
Committee members is a key factor in the Committee’s 
effectiveness. As part of the Board’s externally-facilitated 
performance evaluation which concluded during the 
year, the Audit & Risk Committee also reviewed its own 
performance. The Audit & Risk Committee has confirmed 
that the collective financial and sector experience of its 
members is considered to be appropriate, relevant and 
sufficiently recent to enable the Committee to discharge its 
responsibilities in full. 

Meeting 
attendance

Sharon Brown
Audit & Risk Committee Chairman
Independent Non-Executive Director
Member of the Chartered Institute 
of Management Accountants
Previous experience as a Finance Director
Chairs the Audit Committees of a number 
of other companies

Georgina Harvey
Audit & Risk Committee Member
Senior Independent Director

Jens Hofma
Audit & Risk Committee Member since 1 July 2017
Independent Non-Executive Director

Angus Porter
Audit & Risk Committee member until 1 July 2017
Chairman of the Board (considered independent 
on appointment)

The biography of each member of the Audit & Risk 
Committee can be found on page 51.

Audit & Risk Committee’s responsibilities
The Board has delegated a number of responsibilities to 
the Audit & Risk Committee in order to provide the Board 
and Shareholders with assurance that key financial and risk 
matters are being overseen and challenged by Independent 
Non-Executive Directors who are not involved on a day-
to-day basis with the management or control of those 
functions. The Committee oversees financial reporting, 
external audit and internal controls, and reviews factors 
that influence the effectiveness of the external Auditor, 
for example their independence. The Audit & Risk Committee 
is responsible for making recommendations to the Board on 
a number of different matters including on the appointment 
of the Company’s external Auditor, approval of financial 
disclosures, including the Annual Report and Accounts and 
Interim Financial Statements. 

In addition, the Committee has responsibility, in the absence 
of a separate risk committee, for oversight of risk and risk 
management systems. It reviews some of the Company’s 
key policies to ensure that wrong-doing such as bribery 
and fraud is, as far as possible, prevented and, where it 
occurs, is detected and lessons are learned. As part of 
this, the Committee is responsible for ensuring that there 
are effective arrangements in place to enable colleagues 
to speak up in confidence if they become aware of any 
wrong-doing occurring within the business, including any 
conduct that is illegal. 

The Committee undertook a thorough review of its terms of 
reference during the year and adopted several changes to 
ensure continued compliance with best practice. A copy 
of the Committee’s terms of reference are available on the 
McColl’s website at www.mccollsplc.co.uk/committees.

Audit & Risk Committee’s activities
Given its extensive remit, it is vital that the Audit & 
Risk Committee organises its time so as to cover all its 
responsibilities regularly. Agendas are planned, with 
the support of the Company Secretary, to ensure that 
the responsibilities set out in the Committee’s terms of 
reference are fully discharged at the most appropriate 
time in the annual calendar. For example, the Audit & Risk 
Committee conducted a full review of the risk register and 
risk management framework in advance of the Board’s 
strategy meeting in order to inform the Board’s consideration 
of strategic plans. 

Planning the year ahead also helps ensure that less time-
critical matters can be spread evenly across meetings so 
that adequate time can be provided at meetings for full 
discussion. The way in which the Audit & Risk Committee 
divided its time during 2017 is summarised in the table of key 
agenda items on page 65.

64  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

Meeting date

Key agenda items

Feb

Jul

Oct

Nov

•  year-end external audit outcomes
•  draft Annual Report and Accounts 2016 and related matters
•  external Auditor independence, objectivity and reappointment
•  principal risk disclosures
•  Committee performance evaluation

•  half year external review outcomes
•  half year 2017 announcement and related matters
•  risk register 
•  Committee terms of reference
•  policy on related party transactions 

•  year-end external audit scoping
•  risk register as background to the Board’s strategy review
•  policy on provision of non-audit services by the Auditor

•  year-end external audit plan
•  key accounting policies
•  financial and internal controls
•  risk management systems
•  consideration of the requirement for an internal audit function 
•  compliance, fraud, whistleblowing, bribery incidents review
•  policies on speaking up in confidence, anti-bribery and employment of former employees  

of the external Auditor

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Making sure the Audit & Risk Committee is well informed
The information that is provided to the Audit & Risk 
Committee is key to ensuring that Committee members 
are sufficiently well informed to enable them to form 
a reasonable view of the matters they are considering. 
Written reports are provided in advance and meetings 
are attended, by invitation, by the Chairman, Executive 
Directors, external Audit Partner and others so that the written 
reports can be discussed and challenged. 

Regular opportunity is also provided for the Committee to 
meet with the Auditor in the absence of management. 

Between meetings the Chairman of the Audit & Risk 
Committee receives regular updates from the Chief 
Financial Officer relating to Audit & Risk Committee 
matters and responsibilities.

Another source of assurance to the Audit & Risk Committee 
could come from an internal audit function which the 
business does not currently have. The Audit & Risk Committee 
reviews annually whether it would be appropriate for an 
internal audit function to be established. During the year the 
Audit & Risk Committee received a report on the existing 
controls within the business and, after discussion, concluded 
that it was not necessary to establish an internal audit 
function at this stage. This decision will be reviewed again 
in 2018.

After each Audit & Risk Committee meeting, actions 
are clearly identified, tracked and reported back 
to the Committee as progress is made in completing 
them. The Committee Chairman reports to the Board 
on the main items discussed at each meeting, including 
recommendations on any items requiring further 
consideration and decision by the Board. The Board also 
receives copies of the Committee’s full minutes.

65

Audit & Risk Committee report continued

Non-audit services
The assurance provided by the external audit process 
is key to ensuring confidence in our financial reporting. 
The Audit & Risk Committee therefore regards the continued 
independence of the external Auditor as vitally important. 
During the year, the Audit & Risk Committee undertook a 
careful review of the Group’s policy on the provision of non-
audit services by the external Auditor and made adjustments 
in a number of areas to ensure the policy was clear and 
robust. In particular, there are specific services identified 
that are prohibited and may not be provided by the 
external Auditor in any circumstances. These include (but 
are not limited to) all tax services, bookkeeping, payroll, 
executive recruitment, internal audit, internal control 
and risk management, expert services (beyond audit) 
and valuations. 

Where the external Auditor provides non-audit services 
which are not prohibited, the Audit & Risk Committee 
has established as part of the policy that, other than in 
exceptional circumstances, the total cost of all non-audit 
services provided by the external Auditor must not exceed 
70% of the cost of statutory audit services (based on the 
average of the last three years). The limit may only be 
exceeded if the Audit & Risk Committee is satisfied the 
external Auditor’s independence will not be compromised 
as a result and believes that the Auditor is best placed to 
undertake a particular piece of non-audit work.

55

Audit and
non-audit
fees

242

Audit fees (£’000)
Non-audit fees (£’000)

66  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

Audit and non-audit fees are shown here and disclosed in 
note 6 to the financial statements. 

The non-audit fees paid during the year related to pensions 
advice. Independence was safeguarded by ensuring that 
the Deloitte team that provided the pensions advice did not 
perform any pension calculations or make any management 
decisions. Their work consisted of corporate advice and was 
not relied upon in the preparation of the financial statements.

Auditor re-appointment
The decision whether to recommend re-appointment 
of the external Auditor is reviewed annually. The Audit & Risk 
Committee has recommended that, for 2018, the incumbent 
external Auditor, Deloitte LLP, be re-appointed. This decision 
was made after considering, amongst other things, the 
effectiveness of the audit team and its key members 
including the Audit Partner, the independence of the firm 
and the audit fees charged. 

The current Audit Partner, Sukie Kooner, was appointed 
in 2014. Deloitte was first appointed as the Group’s auditor 
in 2006. At that point the Group was a private business 
but, following the Group’s listing in 2014, the Group is now 
also subject to regulatory requirements on audit re-tender. 
Accordingly the Group’s external audit arrangements need 
to be re-tendered no later than 2024. However it is currently 
planned that the re-tender will be carried out in time for the 
audit of the 2019 Annual Report and Accounts. The Audit & 
Risk Committee will provide updates on these timings in due 
course ensuring that the process allows sufficient time for 
a well-ordered tender.

Significant accounting judgements and uncertainties 
considered by the committee during the year
Summarised below are the most significant issues considered 
by the Committee in respect of these financial statements 
and how these issues were addressed. Having reviewed 
the audit plan initially and considered and discussed the 
draft financial statements and disclosures in the light of 
the external Auditor’s work and findings, the Audit & Risk 
Committee were satisfied with the significant accounting 
judgements made in preparing them.

Major store acquisition programme
During 2017, the Group completed its acquisition of 298 
stores as agreed in 2016. Each individual store was assessed 
as a going concern and acquisition accounting was 
applied. The acquisition accounting for the transaction was 
considered during the year-end audit and the Committee 
was satisfied that the acquisition met the definition of a 
business combination to which acquisition accounting 
should be applied. The Committee reviewed the actions 
taken to verify the fair value assessment of assets including 
intangible assets and goodwill and were satisfied with the 
key controls that were used to ensure that reasonable 
judgements were applied.

Treatment of supplier income
The business has arrangements with a number of 
different suppliers which adds to the inherent complexity. 
Judgements are in particular required where payment 
periods are not concurrent with the financial year and 
accruals become necessary. The design and implementation 
of relevant controls were assessed in order to provide 

Outline timetable for audit tender

Autumn 
2018

Winter 
2018/2019

Spring  
2019

Summer  
2019

Autumn  
2019

Winter 
2019/2020

Audit tender 
planning

2018 audit carried 
out by incumbent 
Auditor, Deloitte LLP

Publication of 2018 
Annual Report 
and Accounts and 
commencement 
of audit tender 
process

Selection of 
Auditor confirmed 
and transition 
commenced if new 
firm appointed

2019 audit planned 
and preparatory 
work carried out

2019 audit carried 
out by new Auditor

such incidents properly, to reassure colleagues who may 
consider reporting a concern that they can do so without 
fear of detriment, and to make the policy more readily 
understandable and easy to use. The revised policy has been 
incorporated into the Group’s colleague handbook. 

The Committee considers the policy for colleagues to speak 
up in confidence and the procedures that support it to be 
appropriate for the size and scale of the business.

Conclusion
The Audit & Risk Committee has advised the Board that 
the processes in place to ensure that the Annual Report 
and Accounts, when taken as a whole, is fair, balanced 
and understandable, are adequate. The Committee is 
also satisfied that appropriate governance continues to be 
applied to the Company’s systems of internal control, risk 
management and other compliance areas.

Approved by the Audit & Risk Committee and signed 
on its behalf:

Sharon Brown
Audit & Risk Committee Chairman

assurance that the accruals made are appropriate, and 
consistent with the terms of relevant supplier contracts. 
The extent and nature of the audit procedures and testing 
were also reviewed.

Presentation and classification of results
In reviewing the presentation of adjusted profits, the 
Committee fully recognise the importance of ensuring that 
the rationale applied in identifying items for adjustment is 
clear, appropriate and consistent with Group’s accounting 
policies. The most significant items of adjustment are 
identified in the Financial Review on page 34 and in the 
Auditor’s Report on page 95. The Audit & Risk Committee 
challenged and debated the appropriateness of each 
of these significant adjusting items with Management 
and sought an explanation of the judgement made and 
confirmation that a consistent Group policy, which also 
took account of market norms to ensure the treatment was 
consistent with best practice and the practice of others 
in our industry, was applied to treatment of such items. 
The Committee was also mindful of the need for adequate 
disclosure. The inclusion of relevant defined terms in the 
glossary is helpful in this respect.

Management override of controls
Management override is a presumed risk for any business. 
The external Auditor tested the appropriateness of journal 
entries recorded in the general ledger and other adjustments 
made in the preparation of the financial statements and 
reviewed accounting estimates for evidence of bias. 
During the year, the Committee had also received a detailed 
report on the financial controls within the business.

Arrangements for speaking up in confidence 
Consistent with the McColl’s values, the Group seeks 
to operate according to the highest ethical standards. 
An important aspect of this is ensuring that, if a colleague 
becomes concerned about suspected wrong-doing 
within the business, they are aware of how they can report 
their concerns, in confidence, so that the matter can be 
investigated and dealt with appropriately.

During 2017, the Audit & Risk Committee reviewed the Group’s 
policy for speaking up in confidence and made changes 
to emphasise the Board’s commitment to dealing with 

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

67

Remuneration report

“ Incentivising responsible 
delivery of an ambitious 
strategy.”

Georgina Harvey
Remuneration Committee Chairman

Dear shareholder
I am pleased to present the Directors’ Remuneration Report 
for the financial period ended 26 November 2017. This report 
has been prepared in accordance with the Large and 
Medium-sized Companies and Group (Accounts and 
Reports) Regulations 2013, as amended, and the principles of 
the UK Corporate Governance Code.

In its discussions, the Remuneration Committee has been 
mindful of the pay and conditions of colleagues across the 
wider Group. The announcement of new rates of National 
Minimum Wage and National Living Wage from April 2018 
have been reflected in uplifts for our colleagues in store of, on 
average, 2.9%. For our head office and field staff colleagues, 
average increases in salary of 2% have been implemented 
from January 2018. 

Our work has also been informed by the gender pay gap 
analysis and data presented to the Committee during the 
year. The data and an accompanying narrative will be 
separately published as required by the regulations but the 
Committee was relatively pleased to note that the mean 
pay gap across the business was small at 3% (see page 41). 
As a business we are a significant employer of women, with 
over half our stores managed by females. There is always 
more to do however, and our colleague plan (see page 

39-40) is designed to drive further improvements into our 
colleague experience.

Strategic background
During the year we have benefited from a period of stability 
within the Executive team which has enabled encouraging 
progress to be made in delivering our strategy for growth. 
Supported by our excellent colleagues, during the year the 
Executive Directors achieved the smooth transition of the 298 
stores we acquired to the McColl’s brand and negotiated 
a groundbreaking wholesale arrangement which will see 
the much-loved Safeway brand relaunched exclusively 
in McColl’s stores. They also trialled and commenced an 
ambitious programme of store refurbishments. 

Delivery of these exciting strategic projects will continue 
during 2018. The ultimate aim of these initiatives is to improve 
our offering and customer experience, that will in turn drive 
better financial performance.

Alignment of our Executive Directors’ interests with those of 
shareholders is at the heart of our approach to remuneration. 
As well as appropriate performance-related rewards, in 
our new policy we propose to strengthen our shareholding 
guidelines to 200% of salary, supported by a new part bonus 
deferral requirement.

68  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

Annual Bonus Plan
We are always mindful of the positive role that the right 
remuneration and reward structures can play in incentivising 
responsible delivery of an ambitious strategy. The annual 
bonus for 2017 was linked to both stretching operating profit 
targets and the strategic priorities of the business, including 
the achievements described above. Based on performance 
during 2017 (see page 81), the Executive Directors will receive 
an annual bonus for the year of 15% of basic salary relating 
to achievement of the strategic objectives for the year. 
The Executive Directors proposed that the Remuneration 
Committee make no payment in respect of achievement 
of the financial target for the year and the Remuneration 
Committee approved their proposal. 

For 2018, the performance conditions set for the annual 
bonus are again based on achievement of operating profit 
targets and strategic objectives. Well defined qualitative and 
quantitative measures will enable an objective view to be 
reached on the degree to which the latter are achieved. 

The strategic objectives and the underlying measures 
which will inform our judgement on the extent to which they 
have been achieved are described further on page 81. 
In summary they are rollout of the new supply arrangements 
and Safeway brand, delivery of our 100 store refurbishment 
project and implementation of a new customer plan. 

Together, these three priorities will provide the vital building 
blocks for delivering the Board’s long-term strategic vision 
of making McColl’s your neighbourhood’s favourite shop. 
Their inclusion as performance measures in the annual bonus 
plan provides assurance that the Executive team will be 
focused not only on delivering the current year’s financial 
targets but also on establishing the foundations needed for 
sustainable future growth. 

The importance of ensuring the Executive team’s efforts are 
balanced in this way has been reflected in an adjustment of 
the proportion of bonus that is dependent on the strategic 
objectives. For 2018, 30% of the bonus will be based on 
achievement of the strategic measures with the remaining 
70% dependent on operating profit. Previously, 80% of the 
bonus was payable if the stretch target for operating profit 
was achieved. However, as in previous years, no element of 
the bonus will be awarded unless at least threshold operating 
profit is achieved. 100% of basic salary is the maximum 
payable under the plan. 

Long Term Incentive Plan
In 2018, awards made in 2015 under the McColl’s Long Term 
Incentive Plan (LTIP) will vest subject to achievement of 
performance conditions based 70% on EPS and 30% on TSR. 
The EPS target for the three financial years ended November 
2017 was not achieved and, accordingly, 70% of the LTIP 
awards are not expected to vest. The remaining 30% of the 
2015 awards were dependent on TSR performance. As can 
be seen from the graph on page 84, total shareholder 
return has outperformed against the relevant groups 
and accordingly, subject to Remuneration Committee 
approval, 30% of the 2015 LTIP awards is expected to 
vest. Executive Directors will be required to hold the 
shares acquired from these awards for a minimum of 
two years or longer if needed to achieve the Company’s 
shareholding guideline.

During 2017 we made a grant under the LTIP subject, as 
in previous years, to performance conditions whereby 
vesting will be subject to achievement of EPS (70%) and TSR 
(30%) targets. The TSR measure is calculated relative to the 
combined constituents of the FTSE All Share General Retailers 
Index and the FTSE All Share Food & Drug Retailers Index. 

The Remuneration Committee continues to believe that  
this combination of measures helps to reinforce delivery  
of the Company’s growth plans. For the EPS element of the 
2017 LTIP awards, 25% will vest for three-year cumulative 
EPS of 60.4p and will vest in full at 68.6p. The Remuneration 
Committee considers that these targets will provide Executive 
Directors with an appropriately challenging and meaningful 
incentive to deliver performance aligned with shareholder 
expectations. Beyond the three-year performance period, an 
additional two-year holding period applies to any shares that 
vest for Executive Directors. 

During the year, James Lancaster, who had previously 
received an LTIP award whilst Chief Executive, stepped down 
from the Non-Executive Directorship that he had assumed on 
retirement from his Executive role. James’ LTIP options lapsed 
without vesting as a result of his resignation from the Board.

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Remuneration policy
This year we are required to present a refreshed remuneration 
policy for approval by shareholders at the Company’s 
Annual General Meeting. Therefore, as well as its regular 
work, the Remuneration Committee has undertaken a review 
and benchmarking exercise of Executive remuneration 
arrangements with the assistance and guidance of our 
advisers, Kepler. A small number of adjustments to the 
existing policy are proposed, as described in the Directors’ 
remuneration policy report on pages 71 to 77. We are 
grateful to the shareholders who actively participated in 
our consultation exercise on these proposals and whose 
feedback added additional focus to our determination to 
ensure performance targets remain appropriately stretching. 

Pending approval of the new remuneration policy, no 
change in Executive Directors’ remuneration has been 
made save for an annual increase in basic salary that was 
implemented with effect from January 2018 in line with other 
head office colleagues. 

Annual General Meeting
The Remuneration Committee presents its remuneration 
report on pages 68 to 85. At our Annual General Meeting, 
which will be held on 12 April 2018, the first section, which 
sets out our proposed changes to the remuneration policy, 
will be submitted for approval by shareholders. At the same 
meeting, the second section of this report, the annual report 
on remuneration, which details the implementation of our 
policy, will be subject to an advisory shareholder vote.

Yours sincerely

Georgina Harvey
Remuneration Committee Chairman

69

Remuneration report continued

Remuneration at a glance

The following is a summary of the key components of Executive Directors’ remuneration 
and their single figure total remuneration for financial year ended 26 November 2017.

Key components

Basic salary

Pension benefits

Other benefits

Fixed pay

e
s
o
p
u
P

r

To attract and retain talent 
of the right calibre and with 
the ability to contribute to 
strategy, by ensuring basic 
salaries are competitive in 
the relevant talent market.

To provide post-retirement 
benefits for participants in a 
cost-efficient manner.

To provide a competitive 
and balanced package of 
benefits.

Annual bonus

Long Term Incentive Plan (LTIP)

Variable pay

e To incentivise focus on achievement of 
s
o
p
u
P

stretch profit targets as well as the delivery of 
key strategic priorities for the year.

r

To align the interests of Executives with 
shareholders in growing the value of the 
business over the long term.

Single figure for total remuneration  
of Executive Directors (£’000)

59%

14%

6%

9%

12%

£750

57%

15%

8%

21%

£698

61%

9%

5%

9%

17%

£469

63%

9%

5%

22%

£441

64%

10% 4%

10%

13%

£427

53%

8% 3%

35%

£334

Jonathan Miller1

2017

2016

Dave Thomas

2017

2016

Simon Fuller2

2017

2016

Basic salary
Pension benefit
Other benefits
Single-year variable
Multiple-year variable

1  Jonathan Miller was promoted from Chief Financial Officer to Chief Executive on 1 April 2016.

2  Simon Fuller was appointed Chief Financial Officer on 1 April 2016.

These figures are described in more detail on page 80.

70  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

Directors’ remuneration policy
Directors’ remuneration policy

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

This report sets out the Remuneration Committee’s proposed policy on remuneration for 
Executive and Non-Executive Directors which is to be submitted for approval by shareholders 
at the Annual General Meeting on 12 April 2018. If approved, the policy described below will 
apply from that date for a period of three years.

The proposed policy has been devised taking account of existing arrangements, the results 
of a benchmarking exercise undertaken by the Company’s remuneration advisers and 
their guidance on current best practice and the views of shareholders. The Remuneration 
Committee key objective has been to ensure that our proposed policy will serve the business 
and its shareholders well and that this can best be done by incentivising appropriate 
behaviours and management focus on strategic and financial objectives and by remaining 
attractive as an employer to our successful team and, when necessary, their successors.

The proposed policy retains the key fixed and variable pay elements that comprise existing 
arrangements but, amongst other things, proposes an uplift from 40% to 50% in the amount of 
on-target bonus pay out, together with the introduction of mandatory deferral of the bonus 
in part into McColl’s shares that must then be held for three years. This will help Executive 
Directors achieve the higher shareholding guideline, which we are proposing is increased to 
200% of salary in line with best practice. 

The full proposals, which are outlined below, are intended to strike a better balance than 
the current arrangements between the need to have sufficiently competitive remuneration 
arrangements to enable retention and motivation of executives with the right skills and 
experience, but also ensuring that Executive pay is strongly aligned with shareholder interests 
and incentivises delivery of long term success in the business.

Policy table
The key components of the proposed remuneration policy including differences from the existing arrangements are described below.

Basic salary

Pension

To attract and retain talent of the right calibre and with the ability to 
contribute to strategy, by ensuring base salaries are competitive in 
the relevant talent market.

To provide post-retirement benefits for participants in a cost-efficient 
manner.

Other benefits

To provide competitive benefits for each role.

Fixed pay

Basic salaries are reviewed annually, with reference to individual 
performance, experience, market competitiveness, salary increases 
across the group and the position holder’s experience, competence 
and criticality to the performance of the business.
Generally, the case for making any increases is considered annually.

Executive Directors’ salary increases will normally be in line with those 
for the wider employee population. However, larger changes to 
salary may be made where there is a change in role or responsibilities 
or a significant market misalignment. An additional pay increase of 
approximately 4% is proposed to be made during 2018 for Simon Fuller 
to align the Chief Financial Officer’s basic salary with that of the Chief 
Operating Officer.

All the current Executive Directors receive a salary supplement in 
lieu of pension but, in the case of the Chief Financial Officer, his 
supplement is reduced by the amount that is contributed towards his 
participation in the Group’s defined contribution scheme. Any new 
Executive Director would be eligible to participate in that scheme (or 
any replacement scheme) or to receive a salary supplement in lieu of 
pension provision.

Pension contributions vary based on individual circumstances. 
Pension benefits will be capped at 20% of salary, excluding legacy 
arrangements for the current Chief Executive. Further details are set 
out on page 84.

Benefits may currently include the provision of a car or car allowance, 
fuel, private medical insurance and life assurance.
Reasonable relocation, travel and subsistence allowances and other 
benefits may be provided based on individual circumstances.

These benefits are set at a level that is comparable to market 
practice.
The Committee retains the discretion to amend benefits in 
exceptional circumstances or in circumstances where factors outside 
of the Group’s control have materially changed (e.g. increases in 
insurance premiums).

Individual and Group performance is taken into account when 
determining appropriate salaries.

None.

None.

No change.

No change.

No change.

e
s
o
p
r
u
P

o
t
k
n

i
l

d
n
a

y
g
e
t

a
r
t
s

n
o
i
t

a
r
e
p
O

m
u
m
x
a
M

i

y
t
i
n
u
t
r
o
p
p
o

e
c
n
a
m
r
o

f
r
e
P

s
c
i
r
t
e
m

s
e
g
n
a
h
C

g
n
i
t
s
i
x
e
o
t

y
c

i
l

o
p

71

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ remuneration policy continued

Annual bonus

Variable pay

Long Term Incentive Plan (LTIP)

To focus Executive Directors on achieving stretching profit targets as well as delivering the strategic business 
priorities for the financial period. The partial deferral of bonus into shares is intended to further align 
Directors’ interests with those of shareholders.

To align the interests of Executive Directors with those of shareholders in sustainably growing the value of 
the business over the long term.

Performance measures and targets are set prior to or shortly after the start of the financial period.
At the end of the financial period, the Remuneration Committee will determine the extent to which the 
targets have been achieved.
Under the proposed new policy, one-third of the award after tax will be deferred into shares that must be 
retained for a period of three years, with the remainder paid in cash.
The Committee has discretion to reduce the bonus in the event of serious financial misstatement or 
gross misconduct. In extreme cases of gross misconduct, the Committee may claw back annual bonus 
payments previously made.

The maximum bonus opportunity for Executive Directors is up to 100% of salary.
10% and 50% of maximum will vest for threshold and on target performance respectively. Stretch targets 
apply to the full award.
70% of the award for 2018 will be based on achievement of Group operating profit targets. The remaining 
30% of the award for 2018 will be based on achievement of strategic performance measures. Neither 
element will pay out if the threshold operating profit is not achieved.

The majority of the annual bonus will be based on achievement of a stretching profit target. The remainder 
will be based on strategic performance measures, selected annually by the Remuneration Committee to 
reflect other key performance indicators and strategic priorities for the year ahead. The latter is intended to 
ensure that Executive Directors maintain focus not only on current year financial targets, but also on longer-
term strategic goals to drive sustainable growth.
Details of the measures used during the period under review are set out on page 81. The Committee has 
discretion to adjust the formulaic bonus outcome downwards (or upwards with shareholder consultation) 
within the limits of the plan, to ensure alignment of pay with the underlying performance of the business.

The plan provides for annual awards of performance shares to eligible participants. Vesting is based on 
three-year performance. Executive Directors’ vested shares are subject to an additional two year holding 
period before being released to participants.
The Committee has discretion to reduce any unvested long-term incentive awards (including those in a 
holding period), or to vary the opportunities for future awards, in case of serious financial misstatement or 
gross misconduct. In extreme cases of gross misconduct, the Committee may claw back vested long-term 
incentive awards.
Participants are eligible to receive cash or shares equal to the value of dividends that would have been 
paid over the vesting period on shares that vest.

Awards may be made up to a maximum of 150% of salary in normal circumstances and up to 250% in 
exceptional circumstances.
For the 2018 financial period Executive Directors’ awards will be 150% of salary.

Awards will vest on achievement of financial performance measures, measured over a three-year 
performance period, to include both EPS and TSR.
EPS will receive a weighting in the LTIP of at least 50%. For the 2018 financial period the weightings on EPS 
and TSR will be 70% and 30% respectively.
TSR will be measured on a relative basis against a relevant peer group.
Other measures may be considered in future years to help capture the strategic goals of the business and 
may be used in conjunction with these metrics.
Nothing will vest below threshold. 25% of each element will vest for achievement of threshold performance, 
then increase on a straight-line basis to full vesting for achieving stretch performance.
The committee has discretion to adjust the formulaic LTIP award downwards (or upwards with shareholder 
consultation), within the limits of the plan, to ensure alignment of pay with the underlying performance of 
the business.
Further details of awards to be made during the upcoming financial period are set out on page 82.

Under the proposed policy, the on-target bonus pay out will be increased from 40% to 50% of salary in line 
with common market practice.
The new policy will also introduce mandatory deferral of one-third of any bonus pay out into shares that 
must be held for three years.

No change.

e
s
o
p
r
u
P

o
t
k
n

i
l

d
n
a

y
g
e
t

a
r
t
s

n
o
i
t

a
r
e
p
O

m
u
m
x
a
M

i

y
t
i
n
u
t
r
o
p
p
o

e
c
n
a
m
r
o

f
r
e
P

s
c
i
r
t
e
m

s
e
g
n
a
h
C

g
n
i
t
s
i
x
e
o
t

y
c

i
l

o
p

72  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Shareholding guidelines

To align Directors’ interests with the long-term interests of shareholders.

Other arrangements

Non-Executive Directors’ fees

To reflect the time commitment in preparing for and attending meetings, the duties and responsibilities of the 
role and the contribution expected from the Non-Executive Directors.

Executive Directors will be required to build up and retain a minimum shareholding in the Company 
at least equal to 200% of basic salary. 

To help Executive Directors achieve the required shareholding levels, some mandatory share deferral 
arrangements have been built into the variable elements of pay. One-third of any future annual 
bonus paid will be subject to mandatory deferral into shares to be held for three years. All share 
options that vest under the LTIP, but which must be held for a further period of two years prior to 
exercise, will count towards achievement of the shareholding guideline.

An all-inclusive annual fee is paid to the Chairman.
An annual base fee is paid to other Non-Executive Directors which is inclusive of their membership (but not 
chairmanship) of all Board Committees. Additional fees are paid to the Chairmen of the Audit & Risk and 
Remuneration Committees and to the Senior Independent Director.
Non-Executive Directors do not participate in any incentive schemes, nor do they receive any pension or other 
benefits (other than reasonable out-of-pocket expenses incurred in the proper performance of their duties).

No increases are currently planned for the Non-Executive Director fees although, following a review by the 
Nomination Committee of the time commitment expected of Non-Executive Directors, the additional fees 
payable for chairmanship of the Audit & Risk and Remuneration Committee have been increased from £5,000 
to £8,000 per annum. Future increases may be considered as a result of the outcome of a review process and 
taking into account wider market factors including time commitment and inflation. There is no prescribed 
individual maximum fee but there is an aggregate limit of £500,000. Further details are set out on pages 80 and 84.

None.

None.

The previous level of the shareholding requirement will be increased from 100% of salary to 200%  
of basic salary.
The graph on page 77 illustrates how an Executive Director with no shares might meet the new 
requirement over time.

No change.

e
s
o
p
r
u
P

o
t
k
n

i
l

d
n
a

y
g
e
t

a
r
t
s

n
o
i
t

a
r
e
p
O

m
u
m
x
a
M

i

y
t
i
n
u
t
r
o
p
p
o

e
c
n
a
m
r
o

f
r
e
P

o
t

s
e
g
n
a
h
C

s
c
i
r
t
e
m

g
n
i
t
s
i
x
e

y
c

i
l

o
p

73

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ remuneration policy continued

Performance measure selection and approach to target setting
Annual bonus targets are selected prior to or shortly after the start of the financial period. 
Operating profit is considered to be the best measure of the Group’s annual financial 
performance and will continue to determine the majority (70% for 2018) of the annual 
bonus. The profit target is calibrated with reference to the Group’s budget for the upcoming 
financial period. 

The profit target is supplemented by an element (30% for 2018) based on strategic 
performance measures which are selected annually to reflect the Group’s key strategic 
priorities for the financial period ahead. For 2018 the strategic measures are transition to 
the new wholesale supply arrangements and introduction of the Safeway range across the 
majority of the estate (excluding the 298 stores acquired in 2017), delivery of a significant 
programme of 100 store refurbishments and implementation of a new customer plan. 
Clear and specific measures underpin each of these three strategic priorities to enable the 
degree of successful delivery to be assessed against both qualitative and financial criteria. 
These include specific impacts on like for like sales for the stores that are transitioned to 
the new supply arrangements and/or have been refurbished. No bonus pay out can be 
made based upon the strategic measures unless the profit target is at least achieved at 
threshold level.

For the LTIP which incentivises delivery of longer-term success, EPS is considered to be the 
best measure of the Group’s bottom line financial performance over this time frame and will 
always determine the vesting for at least 50% of the overall LTIP award. For 2018, 70% of the 
LTIP award will be based on delivery of EPS targets. TSR will also be captured to further align 
the interests of LTIP participants with those of shareholders. For awards granted in 2018, TSR 
performance, measured relative to an appropriate peer group, will determine 30% of vesting 
after three years.

Threshold and stretch performance levels under the EPS element of the LTIP are set at the start 
of the three-year performance period. The Remuneration Committee aims to set stretching 
but achievable targets, taking account of a range of reference points, including broker 
forecasts and the Group’s strategic plan. Performance targets for 2017 awards are detailed  
on page 82. The element linked to TSR vests based on three-year TSR compared to a peer 
group comprising the constituents of the FTSE All Share General Retailers Index and the 
FTSE All Share Food & Drug Retailers Index. Threshold vesting for the TSR element is set at 
median ranking with the stretch target set at upper quartile. These targets are in line with 
market practice for other listed companies and are expected to capture a range of good to 
excellent performance for the Group.

The Remuneration Committee has established the following performance adjustment 
principles in order for there to be a shared understanding of the process for making 
adjustments to LTIP performance criteria in appropriate circumstances:

a.  the Committee will consider making an adjustment where a change is recognised as a 

Class 1 transaction (as defined by the UKLA Listing Rules);

b.  the Committee would not make an adjustment where the change results in less than a 5% 

impact on EPS; and

c.  adjustments will be considered between the upper and lower limits defined in a. and b.

The Committee intends to apply these principles in respect of outstanding LTIP awards to 
reflect the 2017 acquisition of the 298 stores and will disclose details of any such adjustments 
after the end of the relevant performance period.

Differences in remuneration policy operated for other employees
Senior management’s remuneration has the same components as set out in the policy, 
being basic salary, annual bonus, pension, life assurance and other benefit provision. 
They may also be invited to participate in the LTIP or alternatively the Company’s share 
option plan. Annual bonus arrangements have the same structure but are subject to lower 
salary multiples, with the potential varying with seniority. Payout arrangements are based on 
specific key performance indicators relevant to each job function. Subject to approval of the 
new remuneration policy, consideration will be given to how an element of mandatory share 
deferral can be introduced into the annual bonus plan for Senior Managers below Board 
level. Shareholding guidelines already apply to our Retail Board members.

All colleagues receive a basic salary and all eligible colleagues are automatically invited 
to enrol into a pension scheme. Store Managers participate in a bonus scheme that targets 
specific key performance indicators for their store.

Other
In addition to the above elements of remuneration, any commitment made prior to, but due 
to be fulfilled after, the approval and implementation of the policy detailed in this report will 
be honoured.

74  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

Performance scenarios
The graph below provides estimates of the potential future reward opportunities for Executive 
Directors, and the potential split between the different elements of remuneration under three 
different performance scenarios; ‘Minimum’, ‘Target’ and ‘Maximum’.

Approach to remuneration for new Director appointments
When recruiting or appointing a new Executive Director, the Remuneration Committee may 
make use of all the existing components of remuneration, as follows:

Component 

Approach

Maximum opportunity

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Executive Director remuneration scenarios for 2018 (£’000)

Jonathan Miller

Minimum

Target

Maximum

Dave Thomas

Minimum

Target

Maximum

Simon Fuller

Minimum

Target

Maximum

Fixed pay
Annual bonus
Long Term Incentive Plan

100%

£600

60%

35%

23%

17%

£994

26%

100%

£359

58%

33%

100%

£341

58%

33%

24%

18%

£615

27%

24%

18%

£587

27%

40%

£1,046

The potential reward opportunities illustrated are based on the policy submitted for approval 
at the Annual General Meeting on 12 April 2018, applied to the basic salaries in force at 
1 January 2018. The projected value of LTIP amounts excludes the impact of share price 
movement or dividend accrual. The assumptions made in illustrating potential reward 
opportunities are shown in the table below:

Performance  
scenario

Fixed pay

Minimum

Target

Maximum

Salary as at most recent review date  
(1 January 2018). Salary supplements in lieu  
of pension contributions of 22.8% and 15%  
of salary are paid to the Chief Executive 
and Chief Operating Officer respectively. 
A combination of salary supplement in 
lieu of pension contribution and a pension 
contribution, together totalling 15% of salary,  
is paid for the Chief Financial Officer.

Other benefits as for the most recent financial 
period.

Annual bonus

LTIP

No annual bonus 
payable.

Threshold not achieved 
(0%).

On target annual 
bonus payable  
(50% of maximum).

Performance warrants 
threshold vesting for 
2018 (25% of maximum).

Maximum annual 
bonus payable  
(100% of salary).

Performance warrants 
full vesting for 2018 
(150% of salary).

Basic salary

Pension

39%

£1,727

Other benefits

The basic salaries of new appointees will be determined 
based on the experience and skills of the individual, relevant 
market data and their current basic salary.

New appointees will be entitled to participate in the 
Group’s defined contribution scheme (or any replacement 
scheme) or to receive a salary supplement in lieu of pension 
contributions.

New appointees will be eligible to receive benefits in line 
with the policy which may include (but are not limited to) 
the provision of a company car or car allowance, fuel, 
private medical insurance and life assurance.

20% of basic salary.

Annual bonus

The structure described in the policy table will apply to new 
appointees with the relevant maximum being pro-rated to 
reflect the proportion of employment over the year.

100% of basic salary.

LTIP

40%

£1,092

New appointees will be granted awards under the LTIP on 
similar terms as other Executives, as described in the policy 
table.

150% of basic salary (250% in 
exceptional circumstances).

In determining appropriate remuneration for a new Executive Director, the Committee 
will take into consideration all relevant factors to ensure that arrangements are in the best 
interests of the Group and its shareholders. The Committee may make an award in respect 
of a new appointment to ‘buy out’ incentive arrangements forfeited on leaving a previous 
employer, using Listing Rule 9.4.2 R if necessary. In doing so, the Committee will take account 
of relevant factors including any performance conditions attached to these awards, the 
likelihood of those conditions being met and the proportion of the vesting period remaining. 
The fair value of any buyout will not exceed that of the award being forgone. 

In cases of appointing a new Executive Director by way of internal promotion, the approach 
will be consistent with the policy for external appointees detailed above. Where an individual 
has contractual commitments made prior to their promotion to Executive Director level, the 
Group will continue to honour these arrangements. Incentive opportunities for below Board 
colleagues are no higher than for Executive Directors, but measures may vary.

In recruiting a new Non-Executive Director, the Remuneration Committee will, subject to 
approval of the new remuneration policy proposed at the Annual General Meeting on 
12 April 2018, use the policy as set out in the table on page 73.

75

Directors’ remuneration policy continued

Service contracts and exit payment policy

Non-Executive Directors
The Chairman, Angus Porter, was appointed as a Non-Executive Director on 1 April 2016. 
Georgina Harvey and Sharon Brown were both appointed as Non-Executive Directors on 
7 February 2014 and Jens Hofma was appointed on 1 July 2017. All Non-Executive letters 
of appointment set out the terms of the individual’s appointment and are available for 
inspection at the Company’s registered office and at the Annual General Meeting. They are 
not eligible to participate in the annual bonus or any equity schemes, nor do they receive 
any additional pension or benefits (other than out of pocket expenses directly incurred in the 
performance of their role) on top of the fees disclosed on page 80. Non-Executive Directors 
have a notice period of one month and receive no compensation on termination.

Executive Directors
On 24 February 2014, Dave Thomas entered into a service agreement with the Company. 
Both Jonathan Miller and Simon Fuller entered service agreements with the Company on 
1 April 2016. In the case of Jonathan Miller, the contract reflected his promotion from Chief 
Financial Officer to Chief Executive. 

The Committee acknowledges that Executive Directors may be invited to become 
Independent Non-Executive Directors of other quoted companies which have no business 
relationship with the Company and that these duties can broaden their experience and 
knowledge to the benefit of the Company. Executive Directors are permitted to accept such 

appointments with the prior approval of the Chairman. Approval will only be given where the 
appointment does not present a conflict of interest with the Group’s activities and the wider 
exposure gained will be beneficial to the development of the individual. Where fees are 
payable in respect of such appointments, these would be retained by the Executive Director.

Each of the Executive Directors’ service agreements is terminable by the relevant individual 
or the Company on not less than 12 months’ prior written notice. Executive Directors may be 
put on garden leave during their notice period and the Company can elect to terminate 
their employment by making a payment in lieu of notice equivalent to up to 12 months’ 
basic salary and benefits. The employment of each Executive Director is terminable with 
immediate effect without notice in certain circumstances which include, for example, where 
an Executive Director commits an act of serious misconduct, commits a material or persistent 
breach of any of the terms or conditions of his service agreement, has a bankruptcy order 
made against him, is convicted of a criminal offence, is disqualified from acting as a director 
or acts in a way which may bring the Company or any member of the Group into disrepute. 

The Company’s policy on termination payments is to consider the circumstances on a 
case-by-case basis, taking into account the Executive’s contractual terms, the circumstances 
of termination and any duty to mitigate.

Executive Director service contracts are available for inspection at the registered office and 
at the Annual General Meeting.

The table below summarises how incentives are typically treated in different circumstances.

Reason for leaving

Bonus

Timing of vesting

Calculation of vesting/payment

Summary dismissal, resignation 1

Awards lapse.

Not applicable.

Good leaver 1, 2

Normally at year end.

Change of control 1

On change of control, or shortly thereafter.

The annual bonus plan for the period under review would normally have performance measured to the end of 
the financial period. In exceptional circumstances, the Committee may bring forward the date of award to the 
termination date and base it on performance over the period to termination. Awards will normally be pro-rated 
for time unless the Committee determines otherwise.

The annual bonus plan for the period under review would normally be paid immediately and be based on  
pro-rata performance to date, with Committee discretion to treat otherwise.

LTIP

Summary dismissal, resignation 

Unvested awards and vested awards that have not 
been called, including shares subject to a holding 
period, lapse.

Not applicable.

Good leaver 1

In line with the vesting schedule at grant.

Change of control

On change of control.

Unvested LTIP shares are normally pro-rated for performance to the end of the performance period. In 
exceptional circumstances, the Committee may bring forward the vesting date to the termination date and 
vest on performance over the period to termination. Awards will normally be pro-rated for time unless the 
committee determines otherwise.

Unvested LTIP shares are normally pro-rated for performance to the date of change of control and paid 
immediately. Awards will normally be pro-rated for time unless the Committee determines otherwise.

1  The treatment of shares subject to deferral or holding periods will be subject to the Remuneration Committee’s discretion and will take into account the circumstances at the time.

2  A ‘good leaver’ is a participant ceasing to be employed by the Group by reason of death, injury, ill health, redundancy, retirement with the consent of the Group, the company of employment ceasing to be a member of the Group or any other reason that the 

Remuneration Committee determines in its absolute discretion (excluding summary dismissal or resignation to join a competitor).

76  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

Shareholding guidelines
The graph below illustrates how an Executive Director who holds no shares in the Company 
might meet the proposed 200% shareholding guideline over a period of years. Performance  
is assumed to consistently result in 50% vesting for the purposes of both the annual bonus 
and LTIP.

Value of shareholding as a percentage of basic salary 

%
300

250

200

150

100

50

0

Year 1

Year 2

Year 3

Year 4

Year 5

Year 6

Year 7

Cumulative holding

Shares acquired

Consideration of employment conditions elsewhere in the Group
The Committee takes into account the levels of basic salary being offered to colleagues 
elsewhere in the Group and, when annually reviewing the salary increases and remuneration 
for the Executive Directors, it looks at what increases are planned for the wider employee 
population. During 2017, the Committee additionally received information about the Group’s 
gender pay gap. Colleagues have not been consulted in respect of the design of the Group’s 
Senior Executive remuneration policy.

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Consideration of shareholder views
The Committee considers shareholder feedback carefully when reviewing remuneration. 
As part of its work to propose the new remuneration policy for approval at the 2018 Annual 
General Meeting, it took advice on current best practice and institutional shareholder 
guidelines. The Committee also undertook an active consultation exercise with shareholders 
representing approximately 65% of the shareholder base in line with the Committee’s policy 
to consult with significant shareholders prior to making any major changes to its Executive 
remuneration structure. Shareholder bodies and advisors were also consulted. 

Feedback from the consultation indicated broad support for the proposals. Some 
respondents sought additional assurance that performance targets would be sufficiently 
stretching considering the proposed increase in potential. In its responses to these points, 
the Committee was able to make reference to the historically low annual bonus payouts 
(approximately 13% on average over the previous three years) as evidence of the 
Committee’s commitment to setting challenging targets. Similarly, whilst the first LTIP award 
made in 2015 has not yet vested, it is not expected to vest in respect of the EPS element (70% 
of the total) despite the excellent progress made within the business. The Committee also 
explained that increasing the proportion of the annual bonus that would be conditional upon 
strategic objectives was intended to ensure that management maintained appropriate focus 
on these important initiatives as well as on delivery of current year financial targets.

The shareholders and advisory bodies who responded, in particular, widely welcomed the 
introduction of mandatory bonus deferral and the proposed increase in the shareholding 
guideline to 200%.

77

Annual report on remuneration

Remuneration Committee composition
The Remuneration Committee is comprised wholly of Independent Non-Executive Directors 
and is supported by the Company Secretary who attends all meetings. The Chief Executive, 
Chief Financial Officer, Chief Operating Officer and Colleague Director, together with the 
Committee’s independent advisers, Kepler (a brand of Mercer), attend committee meetings 
by invitation.

The Remuneration Committee and the Board carried out an externally-facilitated 
performance evaluation which concluded during the year. Following this, an additional 
Non-Executive Director, Jens Hofma, was appointed to bring additional independence to the 
Board and its Committees.

Meeting 
attendance

implementation of the CSOP ‘good leaver’ provisions and valuation of the Group’s share 
based remuneration. 

Kepler do not provide any other services to the Group and the Committee is satisfied 
that they provide independent and objective remuneration advice. Mercer, of which 
Kepler is a part, is a signatory to the Code of Conduct for Remuneration Consultants in the 
UK, details of which can be found on the Remuneration Consultants Group’s website at 
www.remunerationconsultantsgroup.com.

Remuneration Committee activities 
During the 2017 financial year, the committee met three times to consider the following 
remuneration matters:

Meeting date

Key agenda items

Georgina Harvey
Remuneration Committee Chairman
Senior Independent Director

Sharon Brown
Remuneration Committee member
Independent Non-Executive Director

Jens Hofma
Remuneration Committee Member since 1 July 2017
Independent Non-Executive Director

Angus Porter
Remuneration Committee member
Chairman of the Board (considered independent on appointment)

Remuneration Committee responsibilities
The Remuneration Committee has responsibility for deciding the terms and conditions of 
employment, remuneration and benefits of the Executive Directors, including pension rights 
and any compensation payments, and for recommending and monitoring the level and 
structure of remuneration for Senior Managers and the implementation of share option or 
other performance-related schemes. In discharging its responsibilities, the Committee must 
review and have regard to the pay and employment conditions across the business. It must 
also have regard to the views of shareholders, the risk appetite of the Group and McColl’s 
strategic objectives.

To assist them in their work, the Committee has appointed Kepler as its principal external 
adviser. Kepler were appointed independent advisers to the Remuneration Committee 
through a competitive tender process in 2014 and fees for advice provided to the 
Remuneration Committee were £68k for the 2017 financial year. These fees were primarily 
incurred for the advice and support Kepler provided in reviewing the Group’s remuneration 
policy, including the preparatory benchmarking of Executive Directors’ remuneration which 
provided context for the Remuneration Committee’s thinking on the changes that are now 
proposed for shareholder approval. In addition, Kepler provided advice on a proposed 
adjustment of the performance targets for the annual bonus, LTIP and Company Share 
Option Plan (CSOP) for 2016 in the light of the class 1 transaction to acquire 298 stores, 

78  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

Feb

Jul

Nov

•  confirmed Executive Directors’ and Senior Managers’ salary increases
•  considered views expressed in a shareholder consultation on 
adjustment of performance targets following the 2016 class 
1 transaction

•  approved an adjustment in the 2016 EPS performance target for LTIP 

and CSOP subject to future shareholder consultation

•  approved 2016 annual bonus outturn
•  approved, in principle, the 2017 LTIP and CSOP performance conditions
•  evaluated the Committee’s performance as part of Board evaluation
•  agreed, after benchmarking, not to recommend an increase in the 

Chairman’s fee

•  considered the approach to be taken in preparing for the 

remuneration policy review and agreed to instruct Kepler to undertake 
a benchmarking exercise in relation to key elements of fixed and 
variable pay

•  agreed pay and other benefits for a newly-recruited Senior Manager
•  considered gender pay gap and pay ratio information
•  reviewed proposed pay increases for colleagues across the Group
•  agreed a further review of the Committee’s terms of reference should 
be undertaken once best practice recommendations on oversight of 
pay and conditions across the Group are published

•  reviewed proposed salary increases for Senior Managers
•  reviewed potential 2017 bonus outturn 
•  reviewed progress against targets on existing LTIP and CSOP awards
•  approved minor changes to the Directors’ expenses policy
•  agreed initial remuneration policy proposals on which to 

consult shareholders

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Making sure the Remuneration Committee is well informed
In considering remuneration arrangements, Remuneration Committee members need 
sufficient information to enable them to take account of factors including the Group’s strategy 
and attitude to risk, its financial position and prospects, competitive markets including peer 

group practice, and pay and conditions in place for the wider work force. Some examples 
of the information that may be provided to the remuneration committee when making key 
decisions is set out below.

Decision

Information needed

Determining the remuneration policy

•  understanding of Group strategy and risk appetite
•  remuneration consultancy advice
•  benchmarking data

•  best practice and shareholder guidelines, including 

new developments and emerging trends
•  feedback from shareholder consultations

Deciding Executive Directors’  
and Senior Managers’ basic  
salary increases

•  benchmarking or market data
•  assessment of individual effectiveness
•  shareholder view

•  details of pay and conditions across the business 

and in particular the pay increases proposed for the 
wider workforce

Determining annual bonus potential 
and performance conditions

•  remuneration policy limits
•  market data
•  Group budget

•  strategic priorities for the business
•  Group risk appetite
•  shareholder views

Determining annual bonus payouts

•  financial results for relevant period
•  information on the extent to which relevant strategic 

priorities have been achieved

Determining LTIP awards and 
performance conditions

•  remuneration policy limits
•  LTIP rules and share dilution limits 
•  market data

•  relevant financial forecasts based on Group strategy
•  Group risk appetite
•  shareholder views

Determining extent of LTIP vesting

•  LTIP rules and share dilution limits
•  EPS and TSR performance

Determining Executive Directors’ 
or Senior Managers’ benefits on 
recruitment

Considering pay and conditions 
across the business

•  benchmarking or market data
•  evidence of existing pay and rewards package

•  evidence of potential payouts under existing 

employer’s incentive arrangements (where applicable)

•  details of pay and conditions across the business
•  details of proposed pay increases

•  pay ratio calculations
•  gender pay gap information

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

79

Annual report on remuneration continued

Shareholder views are expressed through formal consultation as well as the shareholder 
advisory vote on the remuneration report and, every third year, the binding vote on the 
remuneration policy. In addition, account is taken of published institutional investor guidelines. 

Single figure for total remuneration for Non-Executive Directors (audited)
The table below sets out a single figure for the total remuneration received by each  
Non-Executive Director for the period ended 26 November 2017.

Shareholder consultations are conducted periodically when more significant issues arise 
or when changes to the remuneration policy are being considered. Consultations were 
conducted in relation to a proposed adjustment to the 2016 bonus outturn in the light of 
the 298 store acquisition transaction and on the current remuneration policy proposals. 
A summary of the feedback provided on the latter is provided on page 77.

Written reports are provided in advance and meetings are attended, by invitation, by the 
Executive Directors, Colleague Director and external remuneration adviser so that the written 
reports can be discussed with them and challenged appropriately. 

After each Remuneration Committee meeting, actions are clearly identified, tracked and 
reported back to the Committee as progress is made in completing them. The Committee 
Chairman reports to the Board on the main items discussed at each meeting. 
The Board also receives copies of the Committee’s full minutes unless their circulation 
is deemed inappropriate.

The information provided in this part of the directors’ remuneration report is subject to audit.

Single figure for total remuneration of Executive Directors (audited)
The table below sets out a single figure for the total remuneration received by each Executive 
Director employed by the Company for the period ended 26 November 2017 and the 
prior period:

Salary

Pension 
Benefit3

Taxable 
Benefit4

Annual 
Bonus5

Multiple-year 
Variable6

Total

£’000

2017

2016

2017

2016

2017

2016

2017

2016

2017

2016

2017

2016

Jonathan Miller1
Dave Thomas
Simon Fuller2

441
284
273

397
276
176

103
43
41

102
41
26

46
21
16

53
24
12

66
43
41

146
100
120

94
78
56

–
–
–

750
469
427

698
441
334

1  Jonathan Miller was promoted from Chief Financial Officer to Chief Executive on 1 April 2016.

2  Simon Fuller was appointed Chief Financial Officer on 1 April 2016.

3  Pension benefits include pension contributions and/or salary supplement payments. Pension contributions were paid during 

the year for Dave Thomas and Simon Fuller of £0 and £10k respectively (£14k and £7k in 2016).

4  Taxable benefits for Jonathan Miller, Dave Thomas and Simon Fuller include car or car allowance, of £35k, £12k and £15k (taken 
as car allowance) respectively for 2017 (£37k, £10k and £11k for 2016), fuel allowance of £2k, £1k and £0 for 2017 (£8k, £5k and £0 
for 2016) and healthcare of £8k, £8k and £1k for 2017 (£8k, £9k and £1k for 2016).

5  Annual bonus paid for performance over the relevant financial period. Annual bonus payable in cash. Simon Fuller’s bonus for 

2016 includes £37k relating to the fair value of awards forfeited at his previous employer (paid to him in July 2016).

6  The LTIP was introduced in 2015 under which awards will begin to vest, subject to achievement of stretching performance 
conditions, in 2018. No long term incentives vested during 2016 or 2017 but the awards granted in 2015 were dependent on 
performance to 26 November 2017 and accordingly the value presented in this table represents an estimate of the value of the 
awards that are expected to vest in 2018.

80  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

£’000

Sharon Brown1
Georgina Harvey2
Jens Hofma3
James Lancaster4
Angus Porter5

Salary

2017

50
55
19
146
103

2016

72
53
–
100
30

Taxable Benefit6

2017

2016

2
–
–
–
–

2
–
–
–
–

Total

2017

52
55
19
146
103

2016

74
53
–
100
30

1  Sharon Brown stepped down as Interim Chairman on 1 April 2016. 

2  Georgina Harvey was appointed as Senior Independent Director on 24 May 2016.

3  Jens Hofma was appointed a Non-Executive Director on 1 July 2017.

4  James Lancaster, who was previously Chief Executive, was appointed Non-Executive Chairman on 1 April 2016. He stepped 
down from this role on 27 April 2017 but remained a Non-Executive Director until his retirement on 3 October 2017. Fees shown 
cover the period 1 April 2016 to 3 October 2017 (split between the relevant financial periods).

5  Angus Porter was appointed a Non-Executive Director on 1 April 2016 and became Non-Executive Chairman on 27 April 2017.

6  Taxable benefits include nominal travel expenses to and from Company meetings and tax incurred on those expenses.

The aggregate fees paid to Non-Executive Directors for the year fell within the £500k 
aggregate limit approved in accordance with the Company’s Articles of Association at the 
Company’s 2017 Annual General Meeting.

Basic annual salary (audited)
Basic salaries are generally reviewed annually, with reference to individual performance, 
experience, market competitiveness and salary increases across the Group. The latest 
salary increases were awarded to the Executive Directors on 1 January 2018. The salaries of 
Senior Executives were reviewed by the Committee after the end of the financial period and 
increases averaging 2.4% were awarded effective 1 January 2018. This compares with the 
average pay increase awarded across the wider workforce of 2.9%.

Executive Director

28 November 2016

1 December 2016 26 November 20171

Jonathan Miller 
Dave Thomas
Simon Fuller 

£430,000
£276,000
£265,000

£442,000
£285,000
£274,000

£442,000
£285,000
£274,000

% change during 
financial year

2.8%
3.3%
3.4%

1  Basic salaries for Jonathan Miller, Dave Thomas and Simon Fuller were increased with effect from 1 January 2018 to £450,840, 

£293,550 and £282,220 respectively. A further 4% pay increase will be awarded to Simon Fuller during the year.

Annual bonus (audited)
The Group operates an annual performance related bonus scheme for a number of Senior 
Managers including Executive Directors. For the 2017 financial period, annual bonuses for 
the Executive Directors were based on 80% of operating profit and 20% on key strategic 
performance measures covering successful on-boarding of the acquired 298 Co-op stores 
so as to deliver the benefits envisaged in the original business plan, conducting a wholesale 
retender for implementation during 2018 and delivering other elements of the strategic plan 
for the year covering a number of business enhancements. 

For the operating profit element of the 2017 annual bonus, the performance condition was 
set such that no vesting would occur below threshold, being 95% of target. At threshold and 
target, 10% and 40% of the profit element of the bonus would be awarded respectively. 
Maximum vesting of the profit element would be awarded for achievement of the stretch 
condition of 110% of on-target operating profit. Payments in between these points of 
measurement increase on a straight-line basis. Achievement of threshold operating profit  
is required before any of the strategic performance element of the bonus can vest. 

The maximum total bonus potential for 2017 was 100% of salary for Executive Directors. 
The targets, and achievement against them, were as follows:

Measure

Weighting Threshold

Target

Stretch Achievement

Vesting (% of 
maximum)

Operating profit before bonus, 
profit on asset disposals and 
exceptional items
Successful on-boarding of the 
acquired 298 Co-op stores
Conducting a wholesale 
retender
Delivering other elements of 
the strategic plan for the year

Total

80%

£28.2m £29.6m  £32.4m

£28.4m

0.0%

20%

achieved

15.0%

achieved

partially 
achieved

15.0%

The Executive Directors proposed that no bonus payment be made for 2017 on the 
operating profit target despite the threshold profit for payment of such a bonus having been 
achieved. Having noted that it had discretion to deviate from a purely formulaic approach 
to determining bonus payouts where appropriate, the Committee accepted this proposal. 
Accordingly a bonus payment for 2017 was only considered for the strategic targets.

The newly acquired 298 stores were successfully transitioned on time and within budget 
and accordingly the Remuneration Committee consider this objective to have been fully 
achieved. Likewise, the objective to conduct a wholesale tender that could be implemented 
during 2018 was fully delivered. The wholesale tender exercise delivered its objective of 
moving to a single supply partner that provides the business with access to high quality 
products at a lower cost. In addition, the tender exercise has resulted in the additional benefit 
of access to a high quality own brand in the guise of Safeway, which the business will have 
on an exclusive supply basis for 12 months. The third objective comprised delivery of a suite 
of strategic initiatives. Good progress had been made towards achievement of a number 

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

of these, for example our brand strategy, external communications, colleague plan and 
store trials. However, for other initiatives, including our digital strategy, customer engagement 
and implementation of the next stage of our pricing framework, progress was more limited. 
The objective as a whole was therefore only achieved in part. Accordingly, having taken 
account of the full achievement of two out of three of the strategic targets and the partial 
achievement of the third, the Remuneration Committee determined that a bonus at 15% of 
salary (out of the maximum 20%) should be paid. 

The 2018 annual bonus will be based on a similar structure to the above save for the 
following differences:

•  the bonus payout will be based 70% on achievement of operating profit and 30% on 

strategic performance measures (previously 80% and 20% respectively),

•  subject to approval of the new remuneration policy, on-target achievement of the 

operating profit performance measure will result in 50% payout of the bonus compared  
with 40% in prior years, and

•  subject to approval of the new remuneration policy, one-third of any bonus payout to 

Executive Directors will be deferred into shares that must be held for three years

The strategic objectives for the 2018 bonus plan are the successful transition of all stores to the 
new wholesale supply arrangements (except the 298 Co-op stores acquired in 2017 which are 
subject to a separate supply agreement), including launch of the Safeway range, delivery 
of the Group’s ambitious store refresh programme for the year, and implementation of a new 
customer plan. The degree to which these objectives are achieved will be assessed based 
on underlying measures of success which have been defined to include both qualitative 
and financial indicators. These include like for like sales increases for those stores which have 
been refreshed and/or supplied under the new arrangements. These strategic deliverables 
are considered to be of significant importance to the long term sustainable growth of the 
business. The increased conditionality of the bonus on these strategic goals reflects the 
Board’s desire to ensure they are achieved.

The Committee has discretion to adjust the formulaic bonus outcome downwards, or upwards 
(with shareholder consultation), within the plan limits, to ensure awards properly reflect the 
underlying performance of the business. The Committee may also reduce future annual 
bonus opportunities in light of material misstatement or gross misconduct. In extreme cases of 
gross misconduct, the Committee may claw back annual bonus payments previously made.

81

In addition, for LTIP awards to become exercisable the Committee must be satisfied that the 
formulaic LTIP outcome is a genuine reflection of the underlying performance of the business. 
The Committee has discretion to adjust the formulaic LTIP outcome downwards, or upwards 
(with shareholder consultation), within the plan limits. An additional holding period of 2 years 
from the end of the performance period applies to vested options held by individuals who 
were Executive Directors at the time of grant. 

The Committee has discretion to claw back any unvested long term incentive awards, or to 
vary the opportunities for future awards, in case of serious financial misstatement or gross 
misconduct. In extreme cases of gross misconduct, the Committee may claw back vested 
long term incentive awards. The Group has undertaken a fair valuation of its share-based 
payment transactions, specifically the LTIP and CSOP, using IFRS 2. The results of the valuation 
have given rise to a charge to the accounts as set out in note 32 to the financial statements. 

Annual report on remuneration continued

Long Term Incentive Plan (audited)
The first grant of share options under the LTIP was made in 2015 in respect of performance 
over the financial years 2015 to 2017 inclusive. 30% vesting of the 2015 LTIP award is anticipated 
in view of the overall performance of the business during financial years 2015 to 2017. 
In particular, TSR for McColl’s shares was 85th centile relative to the FTSE All Share General 
Retailer Index and FTSE All Share Food & Drugs Retailers Index. The upper quartile stretch 
target for TSR was therefore exceeded. EPS performance was below the threshold of 55.9p. 
The Remuneration Committee is confident that the investments that the business has been 
making in growing and refurbishing its estate and the progress that has been made on other 
elements of the Group’s longer term strategy will deliver future EPS growth. The following table 
sets out the anticipated value of the 2015 awards on vesting for the Executive Directors.

Anticipated value of 2015 LTIP Awards

Executive

Jonathan Miller
Dave Thomas
Simon Fuller

Interests 
held

111,894
93,243
67,114

Vest %

30%

Interests  
vesting

Date  

vesting

Assumed 
market 
price

Estimated  
value  
(£’000)

35,568
27,972
20,134

17 August 2018
17 August 2018
8 October 2018

£2.79p

94
78
41

Further LTIP awards were made in 2016 and 2017, both based on three year targets for 
cumulative EPS and TSR performance relative to an appropriate peer group. In 2018, it is 
expected that Executive Directors will be granted awards equivalent to 150% of salary under 
the LTIP (100% in 2017). These shares will vest subject to EPS and TSR performance over a 3-year 
period, as follows:

Performance measure element

EPS1 
70%

Below threshold
Threshold
Stretch target or above

TSR2 
30%

Below median
Median
Upper quartile

Percentage of element  
that will vest

0%
25%
100%

1  EPS targets will be set at the time of grant and will be disclosed subsequently. Factors which will be considered when setting 
the relevant EPS targets will include a range of reference points including broker consensus (which was not available at the 
latest practicable printing date for this report). These will be referenced in the market announcement.

2  Total shareholder return relative to the constituents of the FTSE All Share General Retailers Index and the FTSE All Share Food & 

Drugs Retailers Index, measured over 3 financial years.

82  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Awards made under the LTIP and any other share-based schemes (the CSOP) will not exceed the Investment Association’s guideline on dilution of 10% in aggregate over a 10-year rolling 
period. The LTIP grants made since 2015 to the Executive Directors who served during the year are outlined below:

Executive Director

Jonathan Miller

Dave Thomas 

Simon Fuller

Date of grant

Number of shares

Share price1

Face value  
(£’000)

Face value  
(% salary)

Vesting for threshold 
performance2, 3, 4  
(% of maximum)

17 August 2015
11 April 2016
15 March 2017

17 August 2015
11 April 2016
15 March 2017

8 October 20155
11 April 2016
15 March 2017

111,894
259,036
237,634

93,243
166,265
153,225

67,114
159,638
147,311

149.25
166.00
186.00

149.25
166.00
186.00

149.00
166.00
186.00

166
430
442

138
276
285

100
265
274

50%
100%
100%

50%
100%
100%

50%
100%
100%

25%
25%
25%

25%
25%
25%

25%
25%
25%

End of performance  

period

26 November 2017
25 November 2018
24 November 2019

26 November 2017
25 November 2018
24 November 2019

26 November 2017
25 November 2018
24 November 2019

1  Call Price per Award Share: £0.001.

2  2015 LTIP EPS performance conditions range is 55.9 pence to 61.5 pence.

3  2016 LTIP EPS performance conditions range is 52.5 pence to 60.1 pence.

4  2017 LTIP EPS performance conditions range is 60.4 pence to 68.6 pence.

5  Granted prior to his appointment as an Executive Director based on the same performance conditions as the Executive Directors’ awards.

In addition to the above awards, options over 200,751 ordinary shares were granted to James Lancaster in 2015. Those options lapsed under the rules of the LTIP following his resignation from 
the Board on 3 October 2017.

Directors’ shareholdings and interest in shares (audited)
The current Remuneration Policy sets shareholding guidelines which require Executive Directors to acquire and maintain, over time, a personal shareholding in the Company of at least 
equivalent to one times salary. The Remuneration Committee proposes, via a change to the Remuneration Policy submitted for approval to the Annual General Meeting to be held on  
12 April 2018, to increase this requirement to 200% of annual salary. A 200% shareholding guideline is consistent with best practice. The graph on page 77 provides an illustration of how an 
Executive Director might build a holding in shares equivalent to 200% of basic salary.

The table below sets out, for Directors who served during the year, their interests in McColl’s shares and share options as at 26 November 2017.

Options held4

Shares held4

Unvested and  
subject to  
deferral

Unvested and  
subject to 
performance

Vested but not 
exercised

Unvested and 
subject to continued 
employment

Owned outright

Current shareholding 
(% of salary/fee1)

Shareholding 
requirement  

(% of salary/fee)

Guideline met?

Director

Executive Directors
Jonathan Miller2
Dave Thomas
Simon Fuller

Non Executive Directors
James Lancaster3
Georgina Harvey
Sharon Brown
Angus Porter
Jens Hofma

–
–
–

–
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a

608,564
412,733
374,063

–
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a

–
–
–

–
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a

–
–
–

–
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a

11,399,500
1,183,792
–

–
10,471
17,471
5,814
–

7,440
1,198
–

–
34
62
11.6
–

100%
100%
100%

n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a

1  Based on closing share price of £2.885 and prevailing salary on Friday 24 November 2017 (the last dealing day before the 2017 financial year-end).

2  The ordinary shares held by Jonathan Miller include shares held beneficially via holdings of connected persons.

3  James Lancaster stepped down as a Non-Executive Director on 3 October 2017 and disposed of his shareholding on that date.

4  There have been no changes in the Directors’ interests in the shares issued or options granted by the Company between the end of the period and the date of this report.

Yes
Yes
No

n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a

83

Annual report on remuneration continued

Executive Directors’ pension arrangements (audited)
Chief Executive, Jonathan Miller, received a salary supplement in lieu of pension for the full 
year. As a percentage of salary this payment represented 23.4% of basic salary paid to him in 
the year. The monetary amount of his pension supplement shall remain fixed until it reaches 
20% of his salary, at which point it will increase in accordance with the Remuneration policy. 

The Chief Operating Officer received a salary supplement in lieu of pension equivalent to 15% 
of his basic salary. The Chief Financial Officer received a combination of salary supplement in 
lieu of pension and pension contributions equivalent, in aggregate, to 15% of his basic salary. 

Non-Executive Director fees (audited)
Since his appointment on 27 April 2017, the Chairman, Angus Porter, has been paid a fee of 
£145,000 p.a. This fee was set following a benchmarking exercise and is £10,000 p.a. lower than 
the fee paid to the previous Chairman. The base fee for other Non-Executive Directors during 
2017 remained at £45,000 p.a., with additional fees of £5,000 p.a. paid to the Chairmen 
of the Remuneration and Audit & Risk Committees and an additional £5,000 p.a. paid to 
Georgina Harvey for her role as Senior Independent Director. Following a review of current 
Non-Executive fees, which had not changed since 2014, and comparison with market rates, 
with effect from 1 February 2018 the Board have resolved that the fees paid for chairmanship 
of the Remuneration and Audit & Risk Committees will increase to £8,000 p.a. to reflect the 
increasing time commitment required for these roles. No other changes have been made  
or are proposed.

Payments for loss of office (audited)
On 3 October 2017, James Lancaster resigned as a Non-Executive Director of the Company. 
No compensation payments were made to him or to any Director during the year.

Payments to previous Directors (audited)
No payments were made to previous Directors during the financial period under review.

The information in this part of the annual report on remuneration is not subject to audit.

Total shareholder return 

Historical Performance graph – Value of £100 invested on 28 February 2014 (£)

200

180

160

140

120

100

80

60

40

20

0

McColl’s

FTSE All Share General Retailers Index

FTSE All Share Index

FTSE All Share Food & Drug Retailers Index

Feb
2014

Nov
2014

Nov
2015

Nov
2016

Nov
2017

The graph above shows the total shareholder return of the Group and the FTSE All Share 
Index and the FTSE All Share Food & Drug Retailers Index since listing. The FTSE All Share 
Index is chosen as it is a broad market index of which the Group is a member, and the 
FTSE All Share Food and Drug Retailers Index is chosen to illustrate performance relative 
to sector comparators.

Chief Executive single figure of remuneration

James Lancaster
Single figure of remuneration (£’000)
Annual bonus outcome (% of max)
LTIP vesting (% of max)

Jonathan Miller1
Single figure of remuneration (£’000)
Annual bonus outcome (% of max)
LTIP vesting (% of max)2

2013

2014

2015

2016

2017

834
0%
n/a

–
–
–

3,199
0%
n/a

–
–
–

840
0%
n/a

–
–
–

339
39.4%
n/a

504
39.4%
n/a

–
–
–

750
15.0%
30.0%

1  Jonathan Miller was appointed Chief Executive upon the retirement of James Lancaster from that position on 1 April 2016.

2  The LTIP vesting figure for 2017 relates to options granted in 2015 and remains subject to confirmation by the 

Remuneration Committee.

84  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

Change in Chief Executive’s remuneration
The table below sets out the percentage change in the remuneration of the Chief Executive 
and the average increase across all employees excluding the Board between the years 2016 
and 2017.

Chief Executive annual cash (£’000)

2016 (James Lancaster 
and Jonathan Miller1)

2017 Jonathan 
Miller

Average change 
across all 
employees

Change

Salary (£’000)

Pension benefit (£’000)

Taxable benefits (£’000)

Annual variable (£’000)

485

131

56

166

441

9.1% decrease

103

21.4% decrease

2.9%
increase
no change

46

18.0% decrease

no change

160

3.6% decrease 31.3% decrease

1  The % change for the Chief Executive has been determined with reference to the aggregate 2016 remuneration for James 

Lancaster and Jonathan Miller for the period they were each undertaking the role of Chief Executive.

Distribution statement
The following chart shows for the current and preceding financial period the actual 
expenditure and percentage change in total remuneration paid to or receivable by 
colleagues and distributions to shareholders.

Employment remuneration

2017

2016

Distribution to shareholders

2017

2016

£176m

£141m

£11.7m

£11.0m

The Group paid an interim dividend of 3.4 pence per share and the Board has recommended 
a final dividend of 6.9 pence per share subject to approval by shareholders at the Annual 
General Meeting, representing a total payment of £11.7m for 2017. 

Statement of shareholder voting
The following table shows the results of the binding vote on the remuneration policy at the 
17 April 2015 Annual General Meeting and advisory vote on the 2016 Annual Report on 
Remuneration at the 27 April 2017 Annual General Meeting.

Votes

Number (m)

% Number (m)

Remuneration policy 2015
2016 Annual Report on Remuneration

83.9
88.4

98.2
99.9

1.5
0.1

%

1.8
0.1

Number (m)

0.2
0.5

For

Against

Withheld

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Shareholder consultations
In December 2016 the Committee’s Chairman consulted with the Company’s largest 
shareholders regarding the profit element of the annual bonus for 2015/16. This consultation 
related to the impact of the Class one transaction to acquire the 298 convenience stores from 
the Co-op, where £0.5m in pre-acquisition costs were incurred and charged to operating 
profit. The Committee used its discretion to exclude these publicly disclosed costs from the 
2015/16 operating profit bonus calculation. The rationale for applying this discretion focused 
on the fact that the costs:

a.  were operational in nature and included i) the advanced recruitment of field teams  

(e.g. area and regional management); ii) the establishment of larger central functions  
(e.g. payroll, HR and operational finance such as stock counting); and iii) the setting up  
of logistics (including additional distribution);

b.  had been incurred ahead of the stores being transferred; 
c.  having been expensed in the 2015/16 income statement rather than defined as 

exceptional items;

d.  quantified and one-off in nature; and
e.  were beyond management control.

Prior to the above adjustment the annual bonus outcome would have been 28.6% as a 
percentage of maximum. The Committee intends to use adjusted operating profit going 
forward for bonus purposes in a consistent manner, and has developed a set of principles to 
ensure that any adjustments (both positive and negative) are applied consistently and in line 
with shareholder interests.

In December 2017 the Remuneration Committee Chairman also wrote to advisory bodies 
and shareholders holding 1% or more of the Company’s capital, who collectively represent 
approximately 65% of all shares. The letter described changes to the remuneration policy 
that the Committee wished to propose to shareholders for approval at the Annual General 
Meeting in 2018 together with some details about potential changes to the Committee’s 
implementation of the policy. Those changes are described on pages 71 to 77 and the 
response to the consultation is summarised on page 77. 

Approved by the Remuneration Committee and signed on its behalf:

Georgina Harvey
Chairman of the Remuneration Committee

85

Directors’ report

McColl’s Retail Group plc (the 
“Company” or “McColl’s”, or “Group”) 
operates more than 1,600 convenience 
and newsagent stores offering a wide 
range of products and services to 
neighbourhoods across the United 
Kingdom. Our principal activities are 
described in more detail in the Strategic 
Report on pages 11 to 47.

Governance  
at McColl’s

Corporate governance
The Board comprises three Executive Directors, led by our 
Chief Executive, Jonathan Miller, our Chairman, Angus 
Porter who was deemed independent on appointment, 
and three Independent Non-Executive Directors. As a result 
of the changes made to the Board during the year, the 
Board now fully meets the higher standard of independence 
requirements that apply to FTSE 350 companies under 
the provisions of the UK Corporate Governance Code 
(the Code).

The Board’s full commitment to the Code is described 
in the Corporate Governance Report on pages 54 to 59 
and the memberships, remits and activities of Audit & Risk, 
Nomination and Remuneration Committees are set out on 
pages 60 to 62, 64 to 67 and 78 to 80 and form part of this 
Directors’ Report.

Directors
Details of our current Directors can be found on pages 50 
and 51. During the year, the following Directors served.

Director

Angus Porter

Position

Appointment date2

Non-Executive 
Chairman 

1 April 2016

Jonathan Miller

Chief Executive

3 February 2014

Simon Fuller

Dave Thomas

Georgina Harvey

Sharon Brown

James Lancaster1

Jens Hofma

Chief Financial 
Officer

Chief Operating 
Officer

Senior Independent 
Director 
Remuneration 
Committee 
Chairman

Independent Non-
Executive Director
Audit & Risk 
Committee 
Chairman

Non-Executive 
Director

Independent Non-
Executive Director

1 April 2016

3 February 2014

7 February 2014

7 February 2014

3 February 2014

1 July 2017

1  James Lancaster resigned from the Board on 3 October 2017. James served 
as Non-Executive Chairman until 27 April 2017 when he was succeeded by 
Angus Porter.

2  Appointment dates for the Executive Directors indicate when they were 

appointed to the Board of the Company. All the Executive Directors were 
employees of the Group prior to the appointment dates shown and, in the case 
of Jonathan Miller and Dave Thomas, were Directors of the previous holding 
company prior to IPO.

86  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

Powers of Directors
The general powers of the Directors are set out in article 94 of 
the Company’s articles. This provides that the business and 
affairs of the Company shall be managed by the Directors, 
subject to any limitations imposed by the articles, prevailing 
legislation or any directions given by special resolution of the 
shareholders of the Company.

Conflicts of interest
The Board considers and authorises potential or actual 
conflicts as appropriate and these decisions are kept 
under review by the Nomination Committee. Directors with 
a conflict do not participate in the discussion or vote on 
the matter in question. Further detail can be found in the 
Corporate Governance Report on page 62.

Compensation for loss of office
The Company does not have arrangements with any 
Director that would provide compensation for loss of office 
or employment resulting from a takeover, except that 
provisions of the Company’s share plans may cause options 
and awards granted under such plans to vest on a takeover. 
Further information is provided in the Remuneration Report  
on page 76.

Directors’ indemnities and liability insurance
As is standard practice for listed companies, the Company 
has granted a third party indemnity to each of its Directors 
against any liability that attaches to them in defending 
proceedings brought against them to the fullest extent 
permitted under English law. In addition, the Company 
maintains directors’ and officers’ indemnity insurance 
cover for any legal action brought against its Directors. 
Specific public offering and securities insurance cover was 
also placed on 28 February 2014 with a six year run-off period.

The Company’s articles of association
The Company’s articles of association (“articles”) set out 
the rights of shareholders including voting rights, distribution 
rights, attendance at general meetings, powers of Directors, 
proceedings of Directors as well as borrowing limits and 
other governance controls. A copy of the articles can be 
requested from the Company Secretary. The Company may 
alter its articles by special resolution passed at a general 
meeting of the Company.

Listing rules
The following table provides cross-references to where the relevant required information by Listing Rule 9.8.4R for the period 
is disclosed.

Section

Listing rule requirement

Location

1
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14

Interest capitalised
Publication of unaudited financial information
Details of long term incentive schemes
Waiver of emoluments by a Director
Waiver of future emoluments by a Director
Non pre-emptive issues of equity for cash
Item (7) in relation to major subsidiary undertakings
Parent participant in placing by a listed subsidiary
Contracts of significance
Provision of services by a controlling shareholder
Shareholder waivers of dividends
Shareholder waivers of future dividends
Agreements with controlling shareholder

Not applicable
Not applicable
See Remuneration Report on pages 82-83
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

McColl’s 
shareholders 

Share capital
Details of the share capital from 28 November 2016 to 
26 November 2017 are shown in note 28 of the financial 
statements. The nominal value of the total issued ordinary 
share shares of 0.1 pence each in the capital of the 
Company at the start and end of the year was £115,172.77, 
being divided into 115,172,774 fully paid ordinary shares.

The rights attached to the shares can be summarised 
as follows:

1. 

 the ordinary shares rank equally for voting purposes;

2. 

3. 

4. 

5. 

 on a show of hands each shareholder has one vote and 
on a poll each shareholder has one vote per ordinary 
share held;

 each ordinary share ranks equally for any 
dividend declared;

 each ordinary share ranks equally for any distributions 
made on a winding up of the Company; and

 each ordinary share ranks equally in the right to receive 
a relative proportion of shares on the event of a 
capitalisation of reserves.

The Group has an Employee Benefit Trust (EBT) for the 
benefit of employees and former employees of the Group. 
Currently the EBT holds no ordinary shares in the Company.

Shareholders’ rights
The rights attaching to the ordinary shares are governed by 
the articles and prevailing legislation. There are no specific 
restrictions on the size of a holding. Subject to applicable law 
and the articles, holders of ordinary shares are entitled to 
receive all shareholder documents, including notice of any 
general meeting; to attend, speak and exercise voting rights 
at general meetings, either in person or by proxy; and to 
participate in any distribution of income or capital.

87

Directors’ report continued

Restrictions on transfers of securities
As at 26 November 2017, the ordinary shares are freely 
transferable with the following specific exception.

In compliance with the Company’s share dealing code, 
the Directors, designated employees and their connected 
persons require approval to deal in the Company’s shares. 
There are no restrictions on the transfer, or limitations on the 
holding of ordinary shares. The Company is not aware of any 
other agreements between shareholders that may result in 
restrictions on the transfer of securities or voting rights.

Substantial shareholdings
Information on major interests in shares provided to the 
Company under the Disclosure and Transparency Rules 
(DTR) of the UK Listing Authority is published via a Regulatory 
Information Service and on the Company’s website at 
www.mccollsplc.co.uk/rns.

As at the financial year-end and as of 28 February 2018 
(being the last practical day before printing) the Company 
has been notified of the interests detailed in the following 
table, each of which represented holdings of 3% or more of 
the ordinary shares of the Company. This information was 
correct at the date of notification. 

It should be noted that these holdings may have changed 
since notified to the Company. However, notification of any 
change is not required until the next applicable threshold 
is crossed.

Shareholder

Klarus Capital Limited

Aberforth Partners LLP

Jonathan Miller1

FMR LLC

FIL Limited 

Miton Group plc

CI Investments Inc

Notes:

Directors’ interests
There is a shareholding guideline within the existing 
Remuneration Policy that encourages Executive Directors 
to establish and hold McColl’s shares equivalent in value 
to 100% of salary. As part of the new Remuneration Policy 
for which approval will be sought at the Annual General 
Meeting on 12 April 2018, it is proposed to increase this 
shareholding guideline for Executive Directors to 200% 
of salary. The Directors are not required to hold shares in 
the Company under the articles or under their letters of 
appointment or service agreements. All of the Directors, 
except Simon Fuller and Jens Hofma, hold McColl’s shares 
and details of their shareholdings can be found in the 
Remuneration Report on page 83.

26 November 2017

28 February 2018

Number of 
shares

13,118,391

11,406,347

11,399,500

–

6,713,277

6,264,116

3,600,000

% interest  
in shares

Number of 
shares

% interest  
in shares

11.39%

13,118,391

9.90%

9.90%

–

5.82%

5.44%

3.13%

11,598,247

11,399,500

5,779,091

6,713,277

5,550,193

3,600,000

11.39%

10.07%

9.90%

5.01%

5.82%

4.82%

3.13%

1  The ordinary shares held by Jonathan Miller include shares held beneficially via individual holdings of connected persons (as defined in sections 252 to 255  

of the Companies Act 2006).

88  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

McColl’s 
stakeholders

Colleague engagement 
Further information about our colleague engagement is 
provided on pages 39 to 41.

Corporate responsibility and the environment
The Company’s social and environmental review, including 
information about our greenhouse gas emissions and 
approach to corporate responsibility, is set out on pages 37 
to 43. 

During the year, we defined four corporate values to inform 
the way the business, through its colleagues, operates and 
behaves. Our values are:

Customer
first

Simple and
consistent

Caring and
compassionate

Community
champions

We have started to embed these values into our everyday 
operations by incorporating them into policies and 
procedures and by communicating them clearly so that 
there is a good level of awareness and understanding about 
what is expected of McColl’s colleagues. 

The Board and its Committees regularly review the Group’s 
policies and take responsibility for them. 

Financial matters

Future developments within the Group
Disclosures in relation to likely future developments within the 
Group are contained in the Strategic Report.

External Auditor
Deloitte LLP have given their independent report on the 
financial statements to the shareholders of the Company on 
pages 92 to 98.

Directors’ statement of disclosure  
of information to Auditor
The Directors who held office at the date of approval of 
this Directors’ Report confirm that, so far as they are each 
aware, there is no relevant audit information (as defined 
in Section 418(2) of the Companies Act 2006) of which the 
Company’s Auditor is unaware; and each Director has taken 
all the steps that they ought to have taken as a Director to 
make themselves aware of any relevant audit information 
and to establish that the Company’s Auditor is aware of 
that information. This confirmation is given and should be 
interpreted in accordance with the provisions of Section 418 
of the Companies Act 2006.

Post year-end events
Between 26 November 2017 and the date of this report there 
have been no material events. 

Financial risk management
The Company manages its risks to ensure that the Group’s 
performance is not adversely affected by its exposure to 
financial risks resulting from its operation and sources of 
finance. Financial risk management objectives and policies, 
including information on financial risks that materially 
impact the Group can be found in notes 22 and 30 of the 
Group’s financial statements. Details are also available in the 
summary of the principal risks and uncertainties faced by the 
business and management’s approach to identifying and 
managing risk which are provided on pages 44 to 47.

Going concern
The Directors have made appropriate enquiries and consider 
that the Group has adequate resources to continue in 
operational existence for the foreseeable future, which 
comprises the period of at least 12 months from the date of 
approval of the financial statements. The Directors continue 
to adopt the going concern basis in preparing the financial 
statements. The financial position of the Group, its cash flows 
and liquidity position are set out in the financial statements 
section on pages 99 to 134. 

Furthermore, notes 22 and 30 to the Consolidated Financial 
Statements include the Group’s objectives and policies 
for managing its capital, its financial risk management 
objectives, details of its financial instruments and its exposure 
to credit and liquidity risk.

In July 2016, the Company announced it had signed an 
amended credit facility agreement. The updated facility 
consists of a £100m Revolving Credit Facility (a £15m increase 
from the existing £85m, which became available on 
commencement of the 298 store transition to fund working 
capital) and an amortising £100m term loan for specific use 
to part finance the 298 store acquisition. In addition, there 
is a £50m unsecured accordion facility available at the 
Company’s option. At the end of the period, the Group had 
drawn down £154.5m (2016: £37.0m) of its facilities.

The Directors have reviewed the Group’s long-term forecasts 
including its requirements for capital expenditure, operational 
needs and the expansionary impact of the 298 store 
acquisition. The Directors, taking into account these forecasts 
and the revised facilities available to the Group, continue 
to adopt the going concern basis in preparing the financial 
statements. The Directors have made this assessment after 
consideration of the Company’s budgeted cash flows and 
related assumptions and in accordance with the Guidance 
on Risk Management, Internal Control and Related Financial 
and Business Reporting published by the UK Financial 
Reporting Council in September 2014.

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Viability statement
In accordance with provision C.2.2 of the Code, the Directors 
have assessed the prospects of the Group over a longer 
period than the 12 months required by the ‘going concern’ 
provision. The Directors have assessed the viability of the 
Group over a three year period through to 2020 which 
coincides with the Group’s strategic review period. 

This assessment has considered the potential impact of the 
principal risks on the business model, future performance 
and liquidity over the period. In making this statement the 
Directors have considered the resilience of the Group under 
varying market conditions together with the effectiveness of 
any mitigating actions. 

As already described in the statement of going concern, as 
part of this assessment the Directors have taken account of 
the Group’s revolving credit facility with accordion option 
which runs through to July 2021, strong track record of 
operational cash inflow, discretionary capital expenditure 
programmes, and forward dividend cover. 

Additionally, the Directors have reviewed the expected 
impact of government and legislative changes in particular 
the National Minimum and Living Wage, alongside the 
key financial ratios over the period e.g. EBITDA, operating 
profit, fixed charge cover, debt service cover and 
overall indebtedness. 

Finally it is noted that even in the event of a very severe 
impact on the business through continued food deflation 
and cost inflation, the business could reduce or suspend 
acquisitions activity, re-assess the dividend payouts and 
accelerate the newsagent disposal programme. 

Based on this assessment, the Directors have a reasonable 
expectation that the Group will have sufficient resources to 
continue in operation and meet its liabilities as they fall due 
over the period to November 2020.

89

Directors’ report continued

Annual  
General Meeting

AGM
The Board welcome the opportunity to meet and engage 
with shareholders at the AGM which will be held on 
12 April 2018 at 1.30pm at the registered office: McColl’s 
House, Ashwells Road, Brentwood, Essex CM15 9ST. 
The Chairman of the Board and of each of its Committees 
will be in attendance at the AGM to answer questions 
from shareholders. 

All Directors will be standing for reappointment at the AGM. 
The notice of the AGM and an explanation of the resolutions 
to be put to the meeting are set out in the Notice of Meeting 
accompanying this Annual Report and Accounts. 

The Board fully supports all the resolutions and encourages 
shareholders to vote in favour of each of them as they intend 
to in respect of their own shareholdings.

Appointment and retirement of Directors
Subject to a recommendation of the Nomination Committee, 
all Directors stand for re-election at the Company’s Annual 
General Meeting (AGM) in voluntary compliance with 
provision B.7 of the Code. This practice also exceeds the 
requirement of the articles for Directors to retire by rotation at 
every third AGM. 

The Company may, in accordance with and subject to the 
provisions of the Companies Act 2006, remove any Director 
before expiry of his or her term of office by ordinary resolution 
of which special notice has been given. The Company must 
have a minimum of two Directors.

Further information on appointments to the Board is set out 
in the Corporate Governance Report on pages 54 to 59 and 
the Nomination Committee report on pages 60 to 62.

An interim dividend of 3.4p per share was paid on 
8 September 2017. The Directors have also proposed  
a final dividend of 6.9 pence per share, amounting to  
£7.9m, which is subject to shareholder approval at the AGM. 
Provided shareholder approval is received the final dividend 
will be paid on 1 June 2018 to those shareholders on the 
register at the close of business on 20 April 2018. 

Reappointment of Auditor
Deloitte LLP was originally appointed as McColl’s Auditor in 
2006 (when it was a private limited group). The Audit Partner 
last rotated during the year ended 30 November 2014. 

The Board recognises the commercial advantages of 
tendering the audit regularly. Our mandatory ten year 
audit period only commenced upon listing on the London 
Stock Exchange, which was in February 2014. Accordingly, 
the Company has until 2024 to tender the external audit 
although the Audit & Risk Committee has indicated that  
it currently intends to tender the appointment in time for  
audit of the 2019 Annual Report and Accounts. Further details 
about the proposed timing of this tender will be provided  
in due course.

The Auditor, Deloitte LLP, have indicated their willingness 
to continue as the Company’s Auditor and a resolution to 
reappoint Deloitte LLP as Auditor of the Company and the 
Group will be proposed at the 2018 AGM. Further details 
regarding the re-appointment of Auditor may be found in the 
Audit & Risk Committee Report on page 66.

Authority to allot shares
The Company was granted a general authority by its 
shareholders at the 2017 AGM to allot shares pursuant to a 
rights issue up to an aggregate nominal amount of £76,781. 
The Company also received authority to allot shares for 
cash on a non pre-emptive basis up to a maximum nominal 
amount of £38,390. As at the date of this report, 741 shares 
have been issued under these authorities. These authorities 
will expire at the conclusion of the 2018 AGM unless revoked, 
varied or renewed prior to that meeting. Resolutions will be 
proposed at the 2018 AGM to renew these authorities.

Dividend
The Board’s policy is that the Company will generally pay an 
interim and a final dividend in the approximate proportions 
one-third and two-thirds respectively. 

Authority for the Company to purchase its own shares
A resolution was passed at the 2017 AGM authorising the 
Company to purchase up to approximately 10% of its 

90  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

ordinary shares (11,517,277 ordinary shares) at the Directors’ 
discretion. At the date of this report, no ordinary shares have 
been purchased under this authority. A similar resolution 
is proposed to be passed at the 2018 AGM which will, if 
approved, replace the existing authority and will lapse  
at the conclusion of the 2019 AGM.

Political donations
Further to shareholder approval at the 2017 AGM 
empowering the Directors to make political donations 
or incur political expenses, it is confirmed that no such 
donations were made or expenses incurred in the year 
ended 26 November 2017 (2016: £nil). The Company’s policy 
is not to make political donations or incur political expenses 
but a resolution to renew this authority on its expiry will be 
put to the 2018 AGM in order to avoid any inadvertent 
breach of the regulatory requirements that might occur 
if a wide interpretation of political donation were to be 
applied to, for example, some of the Group’s community 
support activities. 

The Strategic Report, the Directors’ Report and the Directors’ 
Remuneration Report were approved by the Board.

By order of the Board

Bernadette Young
Company Secretary

18 February 2018

Statement of Directors’ responsibilities

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

The Directors are responsible for 
preparing the Annual Report and the 
financial statements in accordance 
with applicable law and regulations.

Company law requires the Directors to prepare financial 
statements for each financial year. Under that law the 
Directors are required to prepare the Group financial 
statements in accordance with International Financial 
Reporting Standards (IFRSs) as adopted by the European 
Union and Article 4 of the IAS Regulation and have also 
chosen to prepare the parent company financial statements 
under IFRSs as adopted by the EU. Under company law the 
Directors must not approve the financial statements unless 
they are satisfied that they give a true and fair view of the 
state of affairs of the Company and of the profit or loss of 
the Company for that period. In preparing these financial 
statements, International Accounting Standard 1 requires 
that the Directors:

• properly select and apply accounting policies;

• present information, including accounting policies, in a 

manner that provides relevant, reliable, comparable and 
understandable information; 

• provide additional disclosures when compliance with the 
specific requirements in IFRSs are insufficient to enable 
users to understand the impact of particular transactions, 
other events and conditions on the entity’s financial 
position and financial performance; and

• make an assessment of the Company’s ability to continue 

as a going concern.

The Directors are responsible for keeping adequate 
accounting records that are sufficient to show and explain 
the Company’s transactions and disclose with reasonable 
accuracy at any time the financial position of the Company 
and enable them to ensure that the financial statements 
comply with the Companies Act 2006. They are also 
responsible for safeguarding the assets of the Company and 
hence for taking reasonable steps for the prevention and 
detection of fraud and other irregularities.

The Directors are responsible for the maintenance and 
integrity of the corporate and financial information included 
on the Company’s website. Legislation in the United Kingdom 
governing the preparation and dissemination of financial 
statements may differ from legislation in other jurisdictions.

Responsibility statement 
We confirm that to the best of our knowledge:

• the financial statements, prepared in accordance with 
International Financial Reporting Standards as adopted 
by the European Union, give a true and fair view of the 
assets, liabilities, financial position and profit or loss of 
the Company and the undertakings included in the 
consolidation taken as a whole;

• the Strategic Report includes a fair review of the 

development and performance of the business and the 
position of the Company and the undertakings included 
in the consolidation taken as a whole, together with a 
description of the principal risks and uncertainties that 
they face; and

• the annual report and financial statements, taken as 

a whole, are fair, balanced and understandable and 
provide the information necessary for shareholders 
to assess the Company’s position and performance, 
business model and strategy.

This responsibility statement was approved by the Board of 
Directors on 18 February 2018 and is signed on its behalf by:

Jonathan Miller 
Chief Executive 

18 February 2018 

Simon Fuller
Chief Financial Officer

18 February 2018

91

Financial statements
Financial statements

Independent Auditor’s report to the members of McColl’s Retail Group plc

Report on the audit of the financial statements

Opinion
In our opinion:

• the financial statements give a true and fair view of the state of the Group’s and of the 

parent company’s affairs as at 26 November 2017 and of the Group’s profit for the 52 week 
period then ended;

• the Group financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with 

International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs) as adopted by the European Union;

• the parent Company financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance 

with United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice including Financial 
Reporting Standard 101 “Reduced Disclosure Framework”; and

• the financial statements have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of 

the Companies Act 2006 and, as regards the Group financial statements, Article 4 of the 
IAS Regulation.

We have audited the financial statements of McColl’s Retail Group plc (the ‘Company’) and 
its subsidiaries (the ‘Group’) which comprise:

•  the consolidated income statement;

•  the consolidated statement of comprehensive income;

•  the consolidated and company statement of financial position;

•  the consolidated and company statements of changes in equity;

•  the consolidated statement of cash flows; and

•  the related notes 1 to 34 and C1 to C7

The financial reporting framework that has been applied in the preparation of the Group 
financial statements is applicable law and IFRSs as adopted by the European Union. 
The financial reporting framework that has been applied in the preparation of the parent 
company financial statements is applicable law and United Kingdom Accounting Standards, 
including FRS 101 “Reduced Disclosure Framework” (United Kingdom Generally Accepted 
Accounting Practice).

92  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

Basis for opinion
We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards on Auditing (UK) (ISAs 
(UK)) and applicable law. Our responsibilities under those standards are further described in 
the Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements section of our report. 

We are independent of the Group and the parent company in accordance with the ethical 
requirements that are relevant to our audit of the financial statements in the UK, including the 
FRC’s Ethical Standard as applied to listed public interest entities, and we have fulfilled our 
other ethical responsibilities in accordance with these requirements. We confirm that the non-
audit services prohibited by the FRC’s Ethical Standard were not provided to the Group or the 
parent company.

We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide 
a basis for our opinion.

Summary of our audit approach

Key audit matters

The key audit matters that we identified in the current year were:

•  acquisition of Co-op stores;

•  accounting treatment of supplier income; and

•  presentation and classification of results.

Within this report, any new key audit matters are identified with 
key audit matters which are the same as the prior year identified with 

 and any 

.

Materiality

Scoping

Significant changes 
in our approach

The materiality that we used in the current year was £1,240,000 based on 
4.7% of profit before tax adjusted for certain items due to their nature and 
significance.

The Group consists of a collection of retail stores and operates as a single 
operating segment, entirely within the UK, as disclosed in note 4 to the 
financial statements. We identify only one reporting component on which 
we perform our audit using a single audit team.

Due to the transformation of the business this year we have included a new 
risk in the year around the presentation and classification of results. We have 
continued to assess the acquisition of the Co-op stores as a risk in the period. 
We no longer consider there is a risk surrounding the impairment of goodwill 
and property provisions. We continue to consider a fraud risk for supplier 
income.

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Key audit matters
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgement, were of most 
significance in our audit of the financial statements of the current period and include the 
most significant assessed risks of material misstatement (whether or not due to fraud) that 
we identified. These matters included those which had the greatest effect on: the overall 
audit strategy; the allocation of resources in the audit; and directing the efforts of the 
engagement team.

These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the financial statements as a 
whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on 
these matters.

Last year our report included goodwill impairment and property provisions which are not 
included in our report this year. The goodwill impairment risk of misstatement in the prior year 
related to the uncertainty in forecasts used to support the goodwill carrying value. Due to an 
increase in headroom in the goodwill impairment assessment, we do not consider this to be a 
key audit matter in the current period. 

The property provision risk of misstatement in the prior year related to the uncertainty in cash 
flows used to calculate the property provisions. In the current year, the property provision 
balance excluding the Co-op stores acquisition provision is not considered material. 

We continue to consider a fraud risk in relation to supplier income. We continue to consider 
the acquisition of the Co-op stores as a risk and have pinpointed this to the purchase price 
allocation in the current year. The presentation and classification of results has been included 
in our report this year as this is an area which has had a significant allocation of resources in 
the audit. 

Conclusions relating to going concern, principal risks and viability statement

We confirm that 
we have nothing 
material to report, 
add or draw 
attention to in 
respect of these 
matters.

We confirm that 
we have nothing 
material to report, 
add or draw 
attention to in 
respect of these 
matters.

Going concern
We have reviewed the Directors’ statement in note 2 to the financial 
statements about whether they considered it appropriate to adopt 
the going concern basis of accounting in preparing them and their 
identification of any material uncertainties to the Group’s and Company’s 
ability to continue to do so over a period of at least twelve months from the 
date of approval of the financial statements.

We are required to state whether we have anything material to add or 
draw attention to in relation to that statement required by Listing Rule 
9.8.6R(3) and report if the statement is materially inconsistent with our 
knowledge obtained in the audit.

Principal risks and viability statement
Based solely on reading the Directors’ statements and considering whether 
they were consistent with the knowledge we obtained in the course of the 
audit, including the knowledge obtained in the evaluation of the Directors’ 
assessment of the Group’s and the Company’s ability to continue as 
a going concern, we are required to state whether we have anything 
material to add or draw attention to in relation to:

•  the disclosures on pages 44 to 47 that describe the principal risks and 

explain how they are being managed or mitigated;

•  the Directors’ confirmation on page 89 that they have carried out a 
robust assessment of the principal risks facing the Group, including 
those that would threaten its business model, future performance, 
solvency or liquidity; or

•  the Directors’ explanation on page 89 as to how they have assessed 
the prospects of the Group, over what period they have done so and 
why they consider that period to be appropriate, and their statement 
as to whether they have a reasonable expectation that the Group will 
be able to continue in operation and meet its liabilities as they fall due 
over the period of their assessment, including any related disclosures 
drawing attention to any necessary qualifications or assumptions

We are also required to report whether the Directors’ statement relating 
to the prospects of the Group required by Listing Rule 9.8.6R(3) is materially 
inconsistent with our knowledge obtained in the audit.

93

Financial statements continued

Independent Auditor’s report to the members of McColl’s Retail Group plc continued

Supplier income 

Key audit matter 
description

Supplier income is generated from a number of commercial agreements 
with suppliers including incentives, rebates and discounts. This represents 
a deduction to cost of sales which is material to the Group financial 
statements. There are a large number of individual arrangements which can 
be complex in nature. The majority of these contributions tend to be small 
in unit value but high in volume and span relatively short periods of time, 
although these can be across the financial year-end. 

Judgement is required in determining the period over which the reduction in 
cost of sales should be recognised, requiring both a detailed understanding 
of the contractual arrangements themselves as well as complete and 
accurate source data to apply the arrangements to. Also, the process 
of appropriate recognition in the financial statements can involve 
significant manual adjustments which have the potential for inappropriate 
manipulation.

We identified a key audit matter relating to the accrued supplier income 
recognised in the statement of financial position at the period end. 

On 31 July 2017 McColl’s entered into a new wholesale supply agreement 
with WM Morrison Supermarkets. Due to the material nature of the new 
agreement, we identified a key audit matter relating to the accounting 
treatment for supplier income associated with the agreement. 

The cost of sales accounting policy is outlined in note 2 to the financial 
statements. The Audit & Risk Committee has included this as a key risk 
on page 66.

Acquisition of Co-op stores 

Key audit matter 
description

How the scope 
of our audit 
responded to the 
key audit matter

On 13 July 2016, McColl’s announced the acquisition of 298 stores from the 
Co-op for £117m, representing a Class 1 transaction. The transaction has 
been financed predominantly with additional debt and the balance as 
an equity placing. On 20th December 2016, the Competition and Markets 
Authority (CMA) gave full approval for the acquisition to proceed, with no 
store disposals required. The first store transitioned on 30th January 2017, with 
the final store transitioning on 13 July 2017. 

IFRS 3 requires that all separately identifiable assets and liabilities are 
allocated an appropriate fair value, with the remainder of the purchase 
price recognised as goodwill. Management judgement is required in 
determining the purchase price allocation, particularly the identification 
and valuation of intangible assets. We identified the risk of inappropriate 
allocation as a key audit matter.

The business combination fair values are outlined in note 17 to the financial 
statements. The accounting policy is outlined in note 2.

The Audit & Risk Committee has included this as a key risk on page 66.

Our audit procedures included, but were not limited to:

•  evaluating the design and implementation of controls in place within 

the purchase price accounting process and assessing management’s 
processes for compliance with IFRS 3 Business Combinations;

•  assessing the judgements applied by management in their identification 

of the assets and liabilities acquired;

•  considering whether any other intangible assets should be recognised;

•  evaluating management’s assumptions used in estimating the fair value 

of assets and liabilities acquired by comparing to relevant available 
information, working with our real estate valuation specialists where 
appropriate; and

•  evaluating the adequacy of the business combination disclosures 

against the requirements in IFRS 3

Key observations

We concurred with management’s identification of acquired assets and 
liabilities and found that their valuation was materially accurate. We consider 
the disclosure of the acquisition to be appropriate.

94  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

How the scope  
of our audit 
responded to the 
key audit matter 

Key observations 

Our audit procedures included, but were not limited to:

Presentation and classification of results 

•  evaluating the design and implementation of controls in place over 

supplier income and understanding of the commercial process as well as 
reviewing new and unusual agreements. 

Key audit matter 
description

•  for a statistical sample of supplier income agreements:

 – understanding the contract terms and recalculating the expected 

supplier income;

 – comparing the amounts used in the calculations to actual purchases; 

and

 – testing the IT controls over system-generated reports relating to supplier 

income for accuracy, validity and completeness; 

•  performing analytical work on supplier income trends across suppliers 
and product categories and challenging management’s estimates 
by investigating any unexpected variances and corroborating with 
supporting evidence;

•  assessing the recoverability of a sample of accrued supplier income 

by agreeing to subsequent invoicing and cash receipts, or performing 
alternative procedures such as tracing to third party documentation 
or contracts; 

•  inspecting a sample of post year-end credit notes for evidence of refunds 

or of invoiced amounts not being valid; 

•  applying data interrogation tools to perform an analysis to determine 
if any manual adjustments were recorded within the supplier income 
balance; and

•  reviewing the terms of the WM Morrison Supermarkets wholesale 

agreement and evaluating the accounting treatment for supplier 
income arising from the agreement

The results of our testing were satisfactory and we consider the disclosure 
around supplier income to provide a reasonable understanding of the types 
of supplier income received and the impact on the Group’s balance sheet 
and profit as at 26 November 2017.

Management present adjusted profit excluding items that “may distort 
comparability that arise from events and transactions within the ordinary 
activities of the Group, but that should be separately identified to help 
explain underlying performance”. 

The presentation of income and costs within adjusted measures (to derive 
‘adjusted profit before tax’) under IFRS is judgemental, with IFRS only requiring 
the separate presentation of material items. 

In the Group’s reported results, significant adjustments have been made 
to statutory profit before tax of £18.4m to derive adjusted profit before tax 
of £26.3m. Explanations of each adjustment are set out in notes 5 and 6 to 
the Financial Statements. Owing to the magnitude of these items and the 
inherent judgement required by management, we consider there to be  
a potential for inappropriate classification of costs as adjusted items. 

We identified a key audit matter relating to the appropriateness of the 
Group’s accounting policy of non-GAAP measures; the application of the 
policy in the period; and the disclosure of adjusted items.

The most significant items classified as non-underlying in 2016/17 are:

•  costs associated with acquiring the Co-op stores of £5.0m;

•  costs associated with the store closure programme as part of the business 

restructuring of £2.9m; and

•  property, plant and equipment disposals and property provisions 

resulting in a gain of £3.1m

The Audit & Risk Committee has included this as a key risk on page 67.

95

Financial statements continued

Independent Auditor’s report to the members of McColl’s Retail Group plc continued

Presentation and classification of results continued 

How the scope 
of our audit 
responded to the 
key audit matter

Our audit procedures included, but were not limited to:

•  evaluating the design and implementation of controls of the 
classification of income and expenses as adjusting items; 

•  reviewing the definitions and reconciliations of the alternative 

performance measures included in the annual report;

Our application of materiality
We define materiality as the magnitude of misstatement in the financial statements that 
makes it probable that the economic decisions of a reasonably knowledgeable person 
would be changed or influenced. We use materiality both in planning the scope of our audit 
work and in evaluating the results of our work. 

Based on our professional judgement, we determined materiality for the financial statements 
as a whole as follows:

•  considering the balance of presentation of statutory and non-statutory 

reporting measures;

•  evaluating the appropriateness of the inclusion of items, both individually 

and in aggregate, within adjusted items, this included: 

 – assessing the consistency of items included year on year; and

 – evaluating adherence to IFRS requirements and latest guidance 

from regulators; 

•  inspecting a sample of adjusted items to supporting evidence;

•  assessing unadjusted items, either highlighted by management or 
identified through the course of our audit, which were regarded as 
significant in nature and/or quantum for whether they should be included 
within adjusted items; and

•  discussing the appropriateness of the adjusted items with the Audit & Risk 

Committee and any disclosure considerations

We are satisfied that the items excluded from profit before adjusted items 
and the related disclosure of these items in the financial statements are 
consistent with the Group’s accounting policy on non-GAAP measures.

Materiality

Basis for determining 
materiality

Rationale for the  
benchmark applied

Group financial statements

Parent company  
financial statements

£1,240,000 (2016: £1,000,000)

£154,000 (2016: £181,940)

4.7% (2016: 4.8%) of adjusted 
pre-tax profit. Pre-tax profit has 
been normalised by adjusting 
for adjusted items (the one-off 
costs relating to the Co-op 
acquisition and store closure 
programme). See exceptional 
items disclosure in note 5 to 
the financial statements.

We believe this is an 
appropriate basis for 
materiality as it reflects 
our view that recurring 
performance is the most 
relevant performance 
measure to the stakeholders  
of the entity.

0.2% (2016: 0.3%) of net 
assets. A factor of 3% of net 
assets was used capped to 
an appropriate component 
materiality (12% (2016: 18%)  
of Group materiality.) 

We believe this is an 
appropriate basis for 
materiality as it reflects the 
contribution of the parent 
company to the Group 
performance. 

Key observations

We agreed with the Audit & Risk Committee that we would report to the Committee all audit 
differences in excess of £62,000 (2016: £50,000) for the Group and £7,700 (2016: £9,100) for the 
parent company, as well as differences below that threshold that, in our view, warranted 
reporting on qualitative grounds. We also report to the Audit & Risk Committee on disclosure 
matters that we identified when assessing the overall presentation of the financial statements.

An overview of the scope of our audit
The Group business consists of a collection of retail stores and operates as a single 
operating segment, entirely within the UK, as defined in note 4 to the financial statements. 
The financial results of the Group are aggregated at a consolidated level without the need for 
consolidation adjustments to account for eliminations between Group statutory companies. 
Therefore we identify only one reporting component being the Group itself, which includes 
the parent company audit (which we audit to a lower materiality level), on which we perform 
our audit using a single audit team.

96  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

We have nothing to 
report in respect of 
these matters.

Other information

The Directors are responsible for the other information. The other 
information comprises the information included in the annual report 
including the Strategic Report, the Governance Report and Contacts, 
addresses and shareholder information, other than the financial 
statements and our Auditor’s report thereon.

Our opinion on the financial statements does not cover the other 
information and, except to the extent otherwise explicitly stated in our 
report, we do not express any form of assurance conclusion thereon.

In connection with our audit of the financial statements, our responsibility is 
to read the other information and, in doing so, consider whether the other 
information is materially inconsistent with the financial statements or our 
knowledge obtained in the audit or otherwise appears to be materially 
misstated.

If we identify such material inconsistencies or apparent material 
misstatements, we are required to determine whether there is a material 
misstatement in the financial statements or a material misstatement of the 
other information. If, based on the work we have performed, we conclude 
that there is a material misstatement of this other information, we are 
required to report that fact.

In this context, matters that we are specifically required to report to you 
as uncorrected material misstatements of the other information include 
where we conclude that:

•  Fair, balanced and understandable – the statement given by 

the Directors that they consider the annual report and financial 
statements taken as a whole is fair, balanced and understandable 
and provides the information necessary for shareholders to assess 
the Group’s position and performance, business model and strategy, 
is materially inconsistent with our knowledge obtained in the audit; 
or

•  Audit & Risk Committee reporting – the section describing the work 

of the Audit & Risk Committee does not appropriately address 
matters communicated by us to the Audit & Risk Committee; or

•  Directors’ statement of compliance with the UK Corporate 

Governance Code – the parts of the Directors’ statement required 
under the Listing Rules relating to the Company’s compliance with 
the UK Corporate Governance Code containing provisions specified 
for review by the Auditor in accordance with Listing Rule 9.8.10R(2) 
do not properly disclose a departure from a relevant provision of the 
UK Corporate Governance Code

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Responsibilities of Directors
As explained more fully in the Directors’ responsibilities statement, the Directors are responsible 
for the preparation of the financial statements and for being satisfied that they give a true 
and fair view, and for such internal control as the Directors determine is necessary to enable 
the preparation of financial statements that are free from material misstatement, whether due 
to fraud or error.

In preparing the financial statements, the Directors are responsible for assessing the Group’s 
and the parent company’s ability to continue as a going concern, disclosing as applicable, 
matters related to going concern and using the going concern basis of accounting unless the 
Directors either intend to liquidate the Group or the parent company or to cease operations, 
or have no realistic alternative but to do so.

Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements 
as a whole are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, and to issue an 
Auditor’s report that includes our opinion. Reasonable assurance is a high level of assurance, 
but is not a guarantee that an audit conducted in accordance with ISAs (UK) will always 
detect a material misstatement when it exists. Misstatements can arise from fraud or error 
and are considered material if, individually or in the aggregate, they could reasonably 
be expected to influence the economic decisions of users taken on the basis of these 
financial statements.

A further description of our responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements is located 
on the Financial Reporting Council’s website at: www.frc.org.uk/auditorsresponsibilities. 
This description forms part of our Auditor’s report.

Use of our report
This report is made solely to the Company’s members, as a body, in accordance with 
Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies Act 2006. Our audit work has been undertaken so that 
we might state to the Company’s members those matters we are required to state to them 
in an Auditor’s report and for no other purpose. To the fullest extent permitted by law, we do 
not accept or assume responsibility to anyone other than the Company and the Company’s 
members as a body, for our audit work, for this report, or for the opinions we have formed.

97

Financial statements continued

Independent Auditor’s report to the members of McColl’s Retail Group plc continued

Report on other legal and regulatory requirements

Other matters

Auditor tenure
Following the recommendation of the Audit & Risk Committee, we were appointed by the 
Board of Directors on 3 February 2014 to audit the financial statements for the year ended 
2014 and subsequent financial periods. The entity was listed on the London Stock Exchange 
on 28 February 2014. The period of total uninterrupted engagement including previous 
renewals and reappointments of the firm is four years, covering the years ended 2014 to 2017.

Prior to 2014, we were appointed by the Board of Directors on 1 October 2006 to audit the 
financial statements for the year ended 2006 and subsequent financial periods of McColls 
Retail Group Ltd which was previously the parent company to the Group. The period of total 
uninterrupted engagement including previous renewals and reappointments of the firm was 
12 years, covering the years ended 2006 to 2017.

Consistency of the audit report with the additional report to the Audit & Risk Committee
Our audit opinion is consistent with the additional report to the Audit & Risk Committee we 
are required to provide in accordance with ISAs (UK).

Sukhbinder Kooner, (Senior statutory auditor) 
for and on behalf of Deloitte LLP 
Statutory Auditor 
London, UK 
18 February 2018

Opinions on other matters prescribed by the Companies Act 2006
In our opinion the part of the Directors’ remuneration report to be audited has been properly 
prepared in accordance with the Companies Act 2006.

In our opinion, based on the work undertaken in the course of the audit:

•  the information given in the strategic report and the Directors’ report for the financial year 
for which the financial statements are prepared is consistent with the financial statements; 
and

•  the strategic report and the Directors’ report have been prepared in accordance with 

applicable legal requirements

In the light of the knowledge and understanding of the Group and of the parent company 
and their environment obtained in the course of the audit, we have not identified any 
material misstatements in the strategic report or the Directors’ report.

Matters on which we are required to report by exception

Adequacy of explanations received and accounting records
Under the Companies Act 2006 we are required to report to you if, in our 
opinion:

We have nothing to 
report in respect of 
these matters.

•  we have not received all the information and explanations we require for 

our audit; or

•  adequate accounting records have not been kept by the parent 

company, or returns adequate for our audit have not been received from 
branches not visited by us; or

•  the parent company financial statements are not in agreement with the 

accounting records and returns

Directors’ remuneration
Under the Companies Act 2006 we are also required to report if in our 
opinion certain disclosures of Directors’ remuneration have not been made 
or the part of the Directors’ remuneration report to be audited is not in 
agreement with the accounting records and returns.

We have nothing to 
report in respect of 
these matters.

98  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Consolidated income statement
for the 52 week period from 28 November 2016 to 26 November 2017

Revenue
Cost of sales

Gross profit
Administrative expenses
Other operating income
Profits/(losses) arising on property-related items

Operating profit
Finance income
Finance costs

Net finance cost

Profit before tax
Income tax (expense)/receipt

Profit for the period

Earnings per share (pence)
Diluted Earnings per share (pence)

The above results were derived from continuing operations.

Adjusted 

2017  
£’000

1,131,777
(841,370)

290,407
(286,889)
24,757
3,110

31,385

93
(5,200)

(5,107)

26,278
(5,228)

21,050

18.28p
18.19p

Adjusting  
items 
2017  
Note 5  
£’000

–
–

–
(3,730)
–
(2,621)

(6,351)

–
(1,521)

(1,521)

(7,872)
1,014

(6,858)

–
–

Total  

Adjusted 

2017  
£’000

1,131,777
(841,370)

290,407
(290,619)
24,757
489

25,034

93
(6,721)

(6,628)

18,406
(4,214)

14,192

12.32p
12.26p

2016  
£’000

950,403
(711,752)

238,651
(239,443)
23,147
1,109

23,464

13
(2,723)

(2,710)

20,754
(3,406)

17,348

15.99p
15.99p

Adjusting  
items 
2016  
Note 5  
£’000

–
–

–
(2,186)
–
(757)

(2,943)

–
(152)

(152)

(3,095)
(337)

(3,432)

–
–

Note

4

4

6

8

9

11
11

Consolidated statement of comprehensive income
for the 52 week period from 28 November 2016 to 26 November 2017

Profit for the period

Items that will not be reclassified subsequently to profit or loss
Remeasurements of post employment benefit obligations

Total comprehensive income for the period

Note

9, 31

2017 
£’000

14,192

2,522

16,714

Total  

2016  
£’000

950,403
(711,752)

238,651
(241,629)
23,147
352

20,521

13
(2,875)

(2,862)

17,659
(3,743)

13,916

12.82p
12.82p

2016 
£’000

13,916

(928)

12,988

99

 
 
 
 
Equity
Share capital
Share premium
Retained earnings

Equity attributable to owners of the Group

Note

28
28

2017 
£’000

2016 
£’000

(115)
(12,579)
(133,214)

(145,908)

(115)
(12,579)
(127,812)

(140,506)

These financial statements of McColl’s Retail Group plc registered number 08783477 were 
approved and authorised for issue by the Board on 18 February 2018 and signed on its 
behalf by:

Simon Fuller
Director

Financial statements continued

Consolidated statement of financial position
for the 52 week period from 28 November 2016 to 26 November 2017

Note

2017 
£’000

2016 
£’000

12
14
27
31
15

18
19
20

13

21

26

13

22
23
26
27
31

103,565
248,899
172
13,609
36

366,281

75,965
39,810
14,273

130,048
581

496,910

(165,469)
(2,633)
(4,508)

(172,610)

(830)

(42,811)

(152,968)
(12,121)
(593)
(8,528)
(3,352)

(177,562)

(351,002)

145,908

66,783
154,351
–
10,946
18

232,098

55,041
34,609
3,757

93,407
4,286

329,791

(130,021)
(2,294)
(1,647)

(133,962)

(5,137)

(41,406)

(35,961)
(4,160)
(365)
(4,856)
(4,844)

(50,186)

(189,285)

140,506

Assets
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment
Intangible assets
Deferred tax assets
Retirement benefit asset
Investments

Total non-current assets

Current assets
Inventories
Trade and other receivables
Cash and cash equivalents

Total current assets
Assets classified as held for sale

Total assets

Equity and liabilities
Current liabilities
Trade and other payables
Income tax liability
Provisions

Total current liabilities 
Liabilities directly associated with assets classified 
as held for sale

Net current liabilities

Non-current liabilities
Loans and borrowings
Other payables
Provisions
Deferred tax liabilities
Retirement benefit obligations

Total non-current liabilities 

Total liabilities 

Net assets 

100  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

Consolidated statement of changes in equity
for the 52 week period from 28 November 2016 to 26 November 2017

Consolidated statement of cash flows 
for the 52 week period from 28 November 2016 to 26 November 2017

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Note

10

32

Note

10

At 28 November 2016

Profit for the period
Other comprehensive 
income

Total comprehensive 
income
Dividends
Share-based payment 
transactions

At 26 November 2017

At 30 November 2015 

Profit for the period
Other comprehensive 
income

Total comprehensive 
income
Dividends
New share capital 
subscribed
Other share premium 
reserve movements1

At 27 November 2016

Share  
capital 
£’000

115

Share  
premium 
£’000

12,579

–

–

–
–

–

–

–

–
–

–

Retained 
earnings 
£’000

127,812

14,192

Total  
equity 
£’000

140,506

14,192

2,522

2,522

16,714
(11,748)

16,714
(11,748)

436

436

115

12,579

133,214

145,908

Share  
capital 
£’000

105

Share  
premium 
£’000

47,836

Retained 
earnings 
£’000

78,024

13,916

Total  
equity 
£’000

125,965

13,916

(928)

(928)

12,988
(11,036)

12,988
(11,036)

–

–

–
–

12,579

(47,836)

12,579

–

12,589

47,836

127,812

–

140,506

–

–

–
–

10

–

115

1  On 18 May 2016, the Group received court approval for the special resolution, proposed and passed at the AGM, to cancel 

its share premium account of £47,836,000 and transfer this amount to distributable reserves. This was registered at Companies’ 
House on 23 May 2016.

Cash flows from operating activities
Profit for the period
Adjustments to cash flows from non-cash items
Depreciation and amortisation
Profit on disposal of property plant and equipment
Finance income
Finance costs
Share-based payment transactions
Income tax expense
Impairment losses

Working capital adjustments
Increase in inventories
Increase in trade and other receivables
Increase in trade and other payables
Decrease in retirement benefit obligation 
net of actuarial changes
Increase/(decrease) in provisions

Cash generated from operations
Income taxes paid

Net cash flow from operating activities

Cash flows from investing activities
Interest received
Acquisitions of property plant and equipment
Proceeds from sale of property plant and equipment
Acquisition of businesses, net of cash acquired

Net cash flows from investing activities

Cash flows from financing activities
Interest paid
Proceeds from issue of ordinary shares, 
net of issue costs
Repayment of bank borrowing 
New bank borrowing
(Payment of)/new finance lease creditors
Interest payment to finance lease creditor
Dividends paid

Net cash flows from financing activities

Net increase in cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period

Cash and cash equivalents at end of period

Note

2017 
£’000

2016 
£’000

14,192

13,916

6
6
8
8
32
9

18

31
26

8

24
24

8
10

15,636
(489)
(93)
6,721
436
4,214
746
41,363

(20,924)
(3,969)
40,561

(1,633)
3,089
58,487
(4,267)
54,220

93
(25,655)
7,622
(122,409)
(140,349)

14,305
(352)
(13)
2,875
–
3,743
415

34,889

(1,853)
(5,921)
3,207

(1,025)
(2,504)

26,793
(5,144)

21,649

13
(15,920)
5,874
(15,656)

(25,689)

(6,327)

(2,479)

–
(37,000)
154,500
(2,506)
(274)
(11,748)
96,645
10,516
3,757

14,273

12,559
(7,500)
–
1,921
(199)
(11,036)

(6,734)

(10,774)
14,531

3,757

101

Financial statements continued

Notes to the financial statements 
for the 52 week period from 28 November 2016 to 26 November 2017

1 General information
The Group is a public company limited by share capital, incorporated and domiciled in the 
United Kingdom.

The areas involving a higher degree of judgement or complexity, or areas where assumptions 
and estimates are significant to the financial information are disclosed in note 3.

The address of its registered office is:
McColl’s Retail Group plc
McColl’s House
Ashwells Road
Brentwood
Essex
CM15 9ST
United Kingdom

Principal activity
The Group engages in one principal area of activity, as an operator of convenience 
and newsagent stores.

2 Accounting policies

Basis of preparation
The Group financial statements for 2017 consolidate the financial statements of McColl’s 
Retail Group plc (the ‘Company’) and all its subsidiary undertakings (together, ‘the Group’) 
drawn up to 26 November 2017. Acquisitions are accounted for under the acquisition method 
of accounting. 

The Group financial statements have been prepared on the going concern basis and in 
accordance with IFRS and IFRS Interpretations Committee (IFRIC) interpretations, as adopted 
by the European Union and with those parts of the Companies Act 2006 applicable to 
companies reported under IFRS. The Group’s going concern position is set out in the Directors’ 
report section on page 89. 

The consolidated financial information is presented in sterling, the Group’s functional 
currency, and has been rounded to the nearest thousand (£’000). 

The preparation of financial information in compliance with adopted IFRS requires the use 
of certain critical judgements, estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts 
of assets and liabilities at the date of the financial information and the reported amounts of 
revenues and expenses during the reporting period. It also requires Group management to 
exercise judgement in applying the Group’s accounting policies. 

The estimates and associated assumptions are based on historical experience and various 
other factors that are believed to be reasonable under the circumstances, the results of which 
form the basis of making the judgements about carrying values of assets and liabilities that 
are not readily apparent from other sources. Actual results may differ from these estimates. 

102  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

Basis of measurement
The consolidated financial information has been prepared on a historical cost basis, except 
for net defined benefit pension asset or liability which has been prepared on an actuarial 
basis (refer to individual accounting policy for details).

Basis of consolidation
The Group financial statements consolidate the financial statements of the Company and its 
subsidiary undertakings drawn up to 26 November 2017.

The results of subsidiaries acquired or disposed of during the period are included in the 
consolidated income statement from the effective date of acquisition or up to effective date 
of disposal, as appropriate. 

Business combinations
On acquisition, the assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities are measured at their fair values 
at the date of acquisition.

Any excess of the cost of acquisition over the fair value of the identifiable net assets 
acquired, including separately identifiable assets, is recognised as goodwill. Any discount 
on acquisition, i.e. where the cost of acquisition is below the fair values of the identifiable net 
assets acquired, is credited to the income statement in the period of acquisition.

Changes in accounting policy 
New standards, interpretations and amendments not yet effective
The following newly issued but not yet effective standards, interpretations and amendments, 
which have not been applied in these financial statements, will or may have an effect on the 
Company financial statements in future:

IFRS 15 ‘Revenue from Contracts with Customers’
IFRS 15 is effective for periods beginning on or after 1 January 2018. The standard establishes 
a principles-based approach for revenue recognition and is based on the concept of 
recognising revenue for obligations only when they are satisfied and the control of goods or 
services is transferred. It applies to all contracts with customers, except those in the scope 
of other standards. It replaces the separate models for goods, services and construction 
contracts under the current accounting standards. The Group believes that the adoption  
of IFRS 15 will not have a material impact on its consolidated results.

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

IFRS 16 ‘Leases’
IFRS 16 represents a significant change in the accounting and reporting of leases for lessees as 
it provides a single lessee accounting model, and as such, requires lessees to recognise assets 
and liabilities for all leases unless the underlying asset has a low value or the lease term is 
12 months or less. Accounting requirements for lessors are substantially unchanged from IAS 17. 
The Group has carried out preliminary work to assess the accounting impacts of the change. 
From work performed to date, it is expected that implementation of the new standard will 
have a substantial impact on the consolidated results of the Group. The Group continues 
to assess the full impact of IFRS 16, however, the impact will depend on the facts and 
circumstances at the time of adoption and upon transition choices adopted. It is therefore 
not yet practicable to provide a reliable estimate.

IFRS 9 ‘Financial Instruments’
IFRS 9 replaces IAS 39. The standard is effective from 1 January 2018 and introduces: new 
requirements for the classification and measurement of financial assets and financial 
liabilities; a new model based on expected credit losses for recognising provisions; and 
provides for simplified hedge accounting by aligning hedge accounting more closely with  
an entity’s risk management methodology. The Group believes that the adoption of IFRS 9  
will not have a material impact on its consolidated results. 

In addition to the above new standards or amendments, there are additional new standards 
and amendments which will not be applicable to the Group and as such have not 
been listed.

None of the other standards, interpretations and amendments which are effective for periods 
beginning after 28 November 2016 and which have not been adopted early, are expected to 
have a material effect on the financial statements.

Revenue recognition
Revenue represents the amounts receivable for goods and services sold through retail outlets 
in the period which fall within the Group’s principal activities, stated net of value added tax. 
Revenue is shown net of returns. Revenue is recognised when the significant risks and rewards 
of goods and services have been passed to the buyer and can be measured reliably. 

Commission from the sale of lottery tickets, travel tickets and electronic phone top-ups is 
recognised net within turnover, when transactions deriving commissions are completed,  
as the Group acts as an agent. 

In the opinion of the Directors, the Group engages in one principal area of activity, that 
of operators of convenience and newsagent stores. Turnover is derived entirely from the 
United Kingdom.

Cost of sales
Cost of sales consists of all direct costs to the point of sale including warehouse and 
transportation costs. Supplier incentives, rebates and discounts are recognised as a credit to 
cost of sales in the period in which the stock to which the discounts apply is sold. The accrued 
value at the reporting date is included in prepayments and accrued income.

Adjusting items
Adjusting items relate to costs or incomes that derive from events or transactions that fall 
within the normal activities of the Group, but which are excluded from the Group’s adjusted 
profit before tax measure due to their size and nature in order to better reflect management’s 
view of the performance of the Group. The adjusted profit before tax measure (profit before 
adjusting items) is not a recognised profit measure under IFRS and may not be directly 
comparable with adjusted profit measures used by other companies. Details of adjusting 
items are set out in note 5.

Other operating income
Post Office, rental income, ATM commissions and franchise income are recognised in the 
consolidated income statement when the services to which they relate are earned.

Tax
The tax expense for the period comprises current and deferred tax. Tax is recognised in profit 
or loss, except that a change attributable to an item of income or expense recognised as 
other comprehensive income is also recognised directly in other comprehensive income.

Current tax is provided at amounts expected to be paid using the tax rates and laws that 
have been enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date. Current tax is 
charged or credited to the income statement, except when it relates to items charged to 
equity or other comprehensive income, in which case the current tax is also dealt with in 
equity or other comprehensive income respectively.

Deferred tax is accounted for on the basis of temporary differences arising from differences 
between the tax base and accounting base of assets and liabilities. 

Deferred tax is recognised for all temporary differences, except to the extent where a 
deferred tax liability arises from the initial recognition of goodwill or from the initial recognition 
of an asset or a liability in a transaction that is not a business combination and, at the time 
of the transaction, affects neither accounting profit nor taxable profit. It is determined using 
tax rates and laws that have been enacted or substantively enacted by the balance sheet 
date and are expected to apply when the related deferred income tax asset is realised or the 
deferred income tax liability is settled. 

103

Financial statements continued

Notes to the financial statements continued
for the 52 week period from 28 November 2016 to 26 November 2017

2 Accounting policies continued
Deferred tax assets are recognised only to the extent that the Directors consider that, on the 
basis of all available evidence, it is probable that there will be suitable future taxable profits 
from which the future reversal of the underlying differences can be deducted. 

cash flows that are independent from other assets, the Group estimates the recoverable 
amount of the cash generating unit (CGU) to which the asset belongs. For property, plant and 
equipment and intangible assets excluding goodwill, the CGU is deemed to be each trading 
store. Any resulting impairment is charged to administrative expenses.

Deferred tax is charged or credited to the income statement, except when it relates to items 
charged or credited directly to equity or other comprehensive income, in which case the 
deferred tax is also dealt with in equity or other comprehensive income respectively.

Property, plant and equipment
Tangible fixed assets are stated at cost net of accumulated depreciation and any provision 
for impairment. Cost includes the original purchase price of the asset and the costs incurred 
attributable to bringing the asset to its working condition for intended use. 

Depreciation is provided so as to write off the cost of tangible fixed assets less their estimated 
residual values on a straight-line basis over the expected useful economic lives of the assets 
concerned. Principal rates used for this purpose are:

Depreciation
Depreciation is charged so as to write off the cost of assets, other than land and properties 
under construction over their estimated useful lives, as follows:

Asset class

Depreciation method and rate

Freehold (including land where it is not separately identifiable)

Straight-line basis: 50 years

Long leaseholds improvements

Land (if separately identifiable)

Straight-line basis: 50 years

Nil

Short leaseholds improvements – Shops & Other 

Straight-line basis:10 years

Intangible assets impairment 
For the purposes of impairment testing, goodwill is allocated to each of the Group’s cash 
generating units expected to benefit from the synergies of the combination. Cash generating 
units (CGU) to which goodwill has been allocated are tested for impairment annually, or 
more frequently when there is an indication that the unit may be impaired. If the recoverable 
amount of the CGU is less than the carrying amount of the unit, the impairment loss is 
allocated first to reduce the carrying amount of any goodwill allocated to the unit and then 
to the other assets of the unit pro-rata on the basis of the carrying amount of each asset in the 
unit. An impairment loss recognised for goodwill is not reversed in a subsequent period.

Non-current assets held for sale
Non-current assets are classified as assets held for sale only if available for immediate sale in 
their present condition, a sale is highly probable and expected to be completed within one 
period from the date of classification. Such assets are measured at the lower of the carrying 
amount and fair value less costs to sell and are not depreciated or amortised.

Leased assets
Leases are classified as finance leases when the terms of the lease transfer substantially all the 
risks and rewards of ownership to the Group. All other leases are classified as operating leases. 
For property leases, the land and building elements are treated separately to determine the 
appropriate lease classification.

Leasehold premiums

Motor vehicles

Computer equipment

Furniture and fittings

Straight-line basis: the unexpired 
portion of the lease

Straight-line basis: 4 years

Straight-line basis: 5 years

Straight-line basis: 10 years

Gains and losses on disposal of any fixed assets are determined by comparing proceeds with 
the asset’s carrying amount and are recognised within operating profit.

Fixed asset impairments 
At each reporting date, the Group reviews the carrying amounts of its property, plant and 
equipment and intangible assets to determine whether there is any indication that those 
assets have suffered an impairment loss. If any such indication exists, the recoverable amount 
of the asset, which is the higher of its fair value less costs to sell and its value in use, is estimated 
in order to determine the extent of the impairment loss. Where the asset does not generate 

104  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

Finance leases/hire purchase contracts
Assets funded through finance leases or hire purchase contracts are capitalised as property, 
plant and equipment and depreciated over their estimated useful lives or the lease term, 
whichever is shorter. The amount capitalised is the lower of the fair value of the asset or the 
present value of the minimum lease payments during the lease term at the inception of 
the lease. The resulting lease obligations are included in liabilities net of finance charges. 
Finance costs on finance leases are charged directly to the income statement so as to 
produce a constant periodic rate of interest.

Operating leases
Assets leased under operating leases are not recorded on the balance sheet. 
Rental payments are charged directly to the income statement on a straight-line basis over 
the lease term.

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Sale and leaseback
A sale and leaseback transaction is one where a vendor sells an asset and immediately 
reacquires the use of that asset by entering into a lease with the buyer. The accounting 
treatment of the sale and leaseback depends upon the substance of the transaction 
and whether or not the sale was made at the asset’s fair value. For sale and finance 
leasebacks, any apparent profit or loss from the sale is deferred and amortised over the 
lease term. For sale and operating leasebacks, generally the assets are sold at fair value, and 
accordingly the profit or loss from the sale is recognised immediately in the income statement.

Computer software within intangible assets
Computer software is stated at cost less accumulated amortisation and any provision for 
impairment. Externally acquired computer software and software licences and costs relating 
to development of computer software for internal use (to the extent that they meet the 
recognition criteria of IAS 38 Intangible Assets) are capitalised and amortised on a straight-line 
basis over their useful economic lives of five years and are included within other intangible 
assets. Costs relating to development of computer software for internal use that do not meet 
the IAS 38 recognition criteria are expensed as incurred.

Following initial recognition, the lease treatment is consistent with those principles 
described above.

Lease incentives
Lease incentives primarily include up-front cash payments or rent-free periods. Where lease 
incentives relate to the whole term of the contract lease incentives are capitalised and 
spread over the period of the lease term.

Leases with predetermined fixed rental increases
Where a lease has predetermined fixed rental increases, these rental increases are 
accounted for on a straight-line basis over the term of the lease.

Operating lease income
Operating lease income consists of rentals from sub-tenant agreements and is recognised 
as earned.

Business combinations
On acquisition, the assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities are measured at their fair values 
at the date of acquisition.

Any excess of the cost of acquisition over the fair values of the identifiable net assets 
acquired, including separately identifiable assets, is recognised as goodwill. Any discount 
on acquisition, i.e. where the cost of acquisition is below the fair values of the identifiable net 
assets acquired, is credited to the income statement in the period of acquisition. 

Cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents includes cash in hand, cash in transit, deposits held at call with 
banks, other short-term highly liquid investments with original maturities of three months or less. 

When drawn, bank overdrafts are shown within loans and borrowings in current liabilities in the 
Group balance sheet.

Trade receivables
Trade receivables are amounts due from customers for goods and services performed in 
the ordinary course of business. If collection is expected in one year or less (or in the normal 
operating cycle of the business if longer), they are classified as current assets. If not, they are 
presented as non-current assets. 

Trade receivables are recognised initially at the transaction price. A provision for the 
impairment of trade receivables is established when there is objective evidence that the 
Group will not be able to collect all amounts due according to the original terms of the 
receivables. The amount of any loss is recognised in the income statement.

Inventories
Inventories consist of goods for resale and are stated at the lower of cost and net realisable 
value. Cost is calculated using the retail method for each category of stock by reducing the 
net selling price by the attributable average gross margin. Net realisable value is the price at 
which the stocks can be realised in the normal course of business net of selling and distribution 
costs. Provision is made for obsolete, slow-moving or defective items where appropriate.

Goodwill
Goodwill represents the excess of the fair value of the consideration of an acquisition over the 
fair value of the Group’s share of the net identifiable assets of the acquired subsidiary at the 
date of acquisition. Goodwill is recognised as an asset on the Group’s balance sheet in the 
year in which it arises. Goodwill is not amortised but is tested for impairment at least annually 
and is stated at cost less any provision for impairment. Any impairment is recognised in the 
income statement and is not reversed in a subsequent period.

Trade payables
Trade payables are obligations to pay for goods or services that have been acquired in the 
ordinary course of business from suppliers. Trade payables are classified as current liabilities 
if payment is due within one year or less (or in the normal operating cycle of the business if 
longer). If not, they are presented as non-current liabilities. 

Trade payables are recorded initially at fair value and subsequently measured at amortised 
cost. Generally this results in their recognition at their nominal value.

See note 14 for further details of cash generating units and impairment testing.

105

Financial statements continued

Notes to the financial statements continued
for the 52 week period from 28 November 2016 to 26 November 2017

2 Accounting policies continued

Borrowings
All borrowings are initially recorded at the amount of proceeds received, net of transaction 
costs. Borrowings are subsequently carried at amortised cost, with the difference between the 
proceeds, net of transaction costs, and the amount due on redemption being recognised as 
a charge to the income statement over the period of the relevant borrowing. 

Interest expense is recognised on the basis of the effective interest method and is included 
in finance costs. 

Borrowings are classified as current liabilities unless the Group has an unconditional right 
to defer settlement of the liability for at least 12 months after the reporting date.

Provisions
The Group recognises provisions for liabilities of uncertain timing or amounts, including those 
for onerous leases, leasehold dilapidations and legal disputes. Provisions are recognised 
when there is a present legal or constructive obligation as a result of a past event, for which it 
is probable that an outflow of economic benefit will be required to settle the obligation, and 
where the amount of the obligation can be reliably estimated. Provisions are measured at 
the present value of the best estimate of expenditures expected to be required to settle the 
obligation using a pre-tax rate that reflects current market assessments of the time value of 
money and the risks specific to the obligation. The increase in the provision due to passage 
of time is recognised as interest expense.

Onerous contracts/leases
The Group compares the unavoidable costs of all leases with the expected economic 
benefits on a store by store basis. Once a lease is considered onerous, a provision is 
calculated based on the present value of the unavoidable costs net of expected benefits.

Dilapidations
Provisions for dilapidations and similar contractual property costs are recognised on a lease-
by-lease basis when the need for expenditure has been identified, being the point at which 
the likely expenditure can be reliably estimated.

Contingent liabilities 
Contingent liabilities are possible obligations whose existence will be confirmed only on the 
occurrence or non-occurrence of uncertain future events outside the Group’s control, or 
present obligations that are not recognised because it is not probable that a settlement will 
be required or the value of such a payment cannot be reliably estimated. The Group does 
not recognise contingent liabilities but discloses them. Refer to note 29 for the disclosures.

106  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

Share capital
Ordinary shares are classified as equity. Incremental costs directly attributable to the issue 
of new ordinary shares or options are shown in equity as a deduction, net of tax, from 
the proceeds.

Dividends
Dividend distribution to the Group’s shareholders is recognised as a liability in the 
Group’s financial statements in the period in which the dividends are approved by the 
Group’s shareholders.

Defined contribution pension obligation
Contributions to defined contribution pension schemes are charged to the income statement 
in the year to which they relate.

Defined benefit pension obligation
The Group operates two defined benefit pension schemes in addition to several 
defined contribution schemes, which require contributions to be made to separately 
administered funds. 

Defined benefit scheme surpluses and deficits are measured at: 

•  The fair value of plan assets at the reporting date; less 
•  Scheme liabilities calculated using the projected unit credit method discounted to its 

present value using yields available on high quality corporate bonds that have maturity 
dates approximating to the terms of the liabilities; plus 

•  Unrecognised past service costs; less 
•  The effect of minimum funding requirements agreed with scheme trustees

A surplus is recognised where the Group has an unconditional right to the economic benefits 
in the form of future contribution reductions or refunds. 

Any difference between the interest income on scheme assets and that actually achieved 
on assets, and any changes in the liabilities over the year due to changes in assumptions or 
experience within the scheme, are recognised in other comprehensive income in the period 
in which they arise. 

Costs are recognised separately as operating and finance costs in the income statement. 
Operating costs comprise the current service cost, any income or expense on settlements  
or curtailments and past service costs where the benefits have vested. 

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Past service costs are recognised directly in income unless the changes to the pension 
scheme are conditional on the employees remaining in service for a specified period 
of time. In this case, the past service costs are amortised on a straight-line basis over the 
vesting period. 

Finance items comprise the interest on the net defined benefit asset or liability. 

Further information on pensions is disclosed in note 31.

Share-based payments
Equity-settled share-based payments to employees and others providing similar services 
are measured at the fair value of the equity instruments at the grant date. The fair value 
determined at the grant date of the equity-settled share-based payments is expensed on a 
straight-line basis over the vesting period, based on the Group’s estimate of equity instruments 
that will eventually vest, with a corresponding increase in equity. Where applicable at the end 
of each reporting period, the Group revises its estimate of the number of equity instruments 
expected to vest. The impact of the revision of the original estimates, if any, is recognised in 
the income statement.

For further detail please refer to note 32.

Financial instruments

Financial assets
The Group classifies its financial assets into one of the categories discussed below, depending 
on the purpose for which the asset was acquired. The Group has not classified any of its 
financial assets as held to maturity.

Loans and Receivables
These assets are non-derivative financial assets with fixed or determinable payments that are 
not quoted in an active market. They arise principally from the Group’s trading operations 
(e.g. trade receivables), but also incorporate other types of contractual monetary asset. 
They are initially recognised at fair value plus transaction costs that are directly attributable to 
their acquisition or issue, and are subsequently carried at amortised cost using the effective 
interest rate method, less provision for impairment.

Impairment provisions are recognised when there is objective evidence (such as significant 
financial difficulties on the part of the counter party or default or significant delay in payment) 
that the Group will be unable to collect all of the amounts due under the terms receivable, 
the amount of such a provision being the difference between the net carrying amount and 

the present value of the future expected cash flows associated with the impaired receivable. 
For trade receivables, which are reported net, such provisions are recorded in a separate 
allowance account with the loss being recognised within administrative expenses in the 
consolidated income statement. On confirmation that the trade receivable will not be 
collectable, the gross carrying value of the asset is written off against the associated provision.

The Group’s loans and receivables comprise trade and other receivables and cash and cash 
equivalents in the Group balance sheet.

Financial assets are de-recognised when the rights to receive cash flows from the financial 
assets have expired or where the Group has transferred substantially all risks and rewards 
of ownership.

Financial liabilities
The Group classifies its financial liabilities into the below category:

1) Other financial liabilities
•  Interest-bearing bank loans and overdrafts – these are recorded initially at fair value, which 
is generally the proceeds received, net of direct issue costs. Subsequently, these liabilities 
are held at amortised cost using the effective interest method. Finance charges, including 
premiums payable on settlement or redemption and direct issue costs are accounted for 
on an accrual basis in the income statement using the effective interest method and are 
added to the carrying amount of the instrument to the extent that they are not settled 
in the period in which they arise. Where existing debt is refinanced with the same lender 
it is treated as an extinguishment of the original debt and a new financial liability if the 
modified terms are substantially different from the previous terms.

•  Trade payables and other short-term monetary liabilities which are initially recognised at fair 

value and subsequently at amortised cost using the effective interest method.

Fair value estimation
The methods and assumptions applied in determining the fair values of financial assets and 
financial liabilities are disclosed in note 30.

Offsetting financial instruments
Financial assets and liabilities are offset and the net amount reported in the balance sheet 
when there is a legally enforceable right to offset the recognised amounts and there is an 
intention to settle on a net basis, or realise the asset and settle the liability simultaneously.

107

Financial statements continued

Notes to the financial statements continued
for the 52 week period from 28 November 2016 to 26 November 2017

3 Critical accounting judgements and key sources of estimation uncertainty
In the application of the Group’s accounting policies, the Directors are required to make 
judgements, estimates and assumptions about the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities 
that are not readily apparent from other sources. The estimates and associated assumptions 
are based on historical experience and other factors that are considered to be relevant. 
Actual results may differ from these estimates. 

Judgements
Critical judgements, apart from those involving estimations, that are applied in the 
preparation of the consolidated financial statements are discussed below:

4 Revenue and other income
In accordance with IFRS 8 ‘Operating segments’ an operating segment is defined as a 
business activity whose operating results are reviewed by the chief operating decision maker 
and for which discrete information is available. The chief operating decision maker, who is 
responsible for allocating resources and assessing performance of the operating segments, 
has been identified as the Board of Directors. The principal activities of the Group are currently 
managed as one segment. Consequently all activities relate to this segment, being the 
operation of convenience and newsagent stores in the UK.

The analysis of the Group’s revenue for the period from continuing operations is as follows:

Determination of cash generating units
The Group determines CGUs for the purpose of goodwill impairment based on the way it 
manages the business. Judgement is required to ensure this assessment is appropriate and  
in line with IAS 36. This is discussed in further detail in note 14. 

Sale of goods
Property rental income
Finance income
Other operating income

Note

8

2017  
£’000

1,131,777
3,224
93
21,533

1,156,627

2016  
£’000

950,403
2,985
13
20,162

973,563

Other operating income includes income from the operation of sub-post offices, rental 
income, commission earned from ATMs and Subway franchise income.

Sources of estimation uncertainty
Estimates and underlying assumptions are reviewed on an ongoing basis. Sources of 
estimation and uncertainty are discussed below:

Goodwill impairment 
The Group is required to test, on an annual basis, whether goodwill has suffered any 
impairment based on the recoverable amount of its cash generating units (CGUs). 
The recoverable amount is determined based on value in use calculations. The use of this 
method requires the estimation of future cash flows and the determination of a pre-tax 
discount rate in order to calculate the present value of the cash flows. 

This is discussed in further detail in note 14.

108  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

5 Adjusting items 

Adjusting items
Due to their significance or one-off nature, certain items have been classified as adjusting 
as follows:

6 Operating profit

Arrived at after charging/(crediting)

Co-op acquisition and integration costs1
Impairment and onerous lease provisions related to assets held for sale2
Costs relating to closure of non-trading sites
Finance costs in relation to Co-op acquisition and integration 
Unprofitable store closure programme3
Tax effect 

2017  
£’000

3,447
–
–
1,521
2,904
(1,014)

6,858

2016  
£’000

2,004
757
334
–
–
337

3,432

Depreciation and amortisation expense
Write-down of inventory recognised as an expense
Operating lease expense – property
Profit on disposal of property, plant and equipment
Impairment
Cost of inventories recognised as an expense

The analysis of the Auditors’ remuneration is as follows:

1  Co-op acquisition and integration costs 

On 13 July 2016 management entered into an agreement to purchase 298 convenience stores from the Co-op, for an 
aggregate consideration of £117m. The acquisition was approved by the Competition and Markets Authority on 20 December 
2016. The acquisition was integrated during 2017 by Martin McColl Limited, a wholly-owned subsidiary of the Group. 
The adjusting costs relate to legal fees, sponsor fees and implementation costs. All 298 stores were successfully transitioned by 
13 July 2017.

2  Assets held for sale 

Following a review of its portfolio in 2015, the Group decided to sell 97 of its newsagents. The Group continues to focus on 
the strategy of developing and expanding the convenience business and identified these marginal stores as not being part 
of its long-term planning. As at year end 27 November 2016 there were 75 stores remaining. During 2017 the Group sold 17, 17 
are trading on, and 32 have been transferred to the closure programme, leaving nine remaining at the end of the period.

Audit of Group
Audit of subsidiaries

Total audit fees

Audit related assurance services (including interim review) 

Total assurance services

Services related to corporate finance transactions not covered above 
Other non-audit services not covered above

3  Unprofitable store closure programme 

Management have undertaken a review of poor performing stores and have made the decision to close stores which are 
not economically viable to continue trading. The majority of these stores are either near lease expiry or lease break date. 
The closure programme consists of stores which will either close in 2017 or 2018. Management have adjusted onerous lease 
provisions, impairment, and other costs in relation to the closures. £398,000 of the costs are included within administrative 
expenses. Any other closures costs which cannot be reliably estimated at present, will also be adjusting in 2018.

Total other non-audit services1

Total non-audit services

Total fees

Note

12

2017  
£’000

15,636
13,766
33,810
(489)
746
876,599

2016  
£’000

14,305
8,417
30,191
(352)
415
738,678

2016  
£’000

32
182

214

40

40

290
24

314

354

568

2017  
£’000

60
182

242

41

41

–
14

14

55

297

1 

In 2016 corporate finance transactions were one-off and subject to a tendering process. 2017 fee relates to work on pension 
schemes on behalf of the Group.

109

Financial statements continued

Notes to the financial statements continued
for the 52 week period from 28 November 2016 to 26 November 2017

6 Operating profit continued

Adjusted EBITDA and operating profit excluding property-related items
In order to provide shareholders with a measure of the underlying performance of the 
business and to allow a more understandable assessment of its position, the Group makes 
adjustments to profit before tax. These adjustments are one-off in nature, not in line with our 
normal course of business, material by size and are considered to be distortive of the true 
adjusted performance of the business. Adjusting items relate to costs or incomes that derive 
from events or transactions that fall within the normal activities of the Group, but which are 
excluded from the Group’s adjusted profit before tax measure due to their size and nature 
in order to better reflect management’s view of the performance of the Group. For example, 
the Group adjusts for property related items as these are not in line with our principal activity 
as an operator of convenience and newsagent stores. The Group also adjusts for share-based 
payments as a non-cash item. The adjusted profit before tax measure (profit before adjusting 
items) is not a recognised profit measure under IFRS and may not be directly comparable 
with adjusted profit measures used by other companies. Details of adjusting items are set 
out in note 5.

7 Employee costs
The aggregate payroll costs (excluding Directors’ remuneration) were as follows:

Wages and salaries
Social security costs
Pension costs, defined benefit scheme

2017  
£’000

157,111
15,268
1,549

173,928

2016  
£’000

132,136
5,860
1,008

139,004

The average number of persons employed by the Group (including Directors) during the 
period, analysed by category was as follows:

Retailing
Central administration

Adjusted EBITDA excluding property-related items

Operating profit before adjusting items
Depreciation and amortisation
Impairment of property, plant and equipment  
and onerous leases 
Profits arising on property-related items
Share-based payments

Adjusted operating profit excluding  
property-related items

Operating profit before adjusting items
Less: Profits arising on property-related items

2017  
£’000

2016  
£’000

8 Finance income and costs

31,385
15,289

–
(3,110)
436

44,000

31,385
(3,110)

28,275

23,464
14,305

308
(1,422)
–

36,655

23,464
(1,109)

22,355

Finance income
Interest income on bank deposits
Finance costs

Interest on bank overdrafts and borrowings
Interest on obligations under finance leases and hire 
purchase contracts
Amortisation of issue costs
Other finance costs
Finance costs in relation to Co-op acquisition and integration 
(included in adjusting items)

Total finance costs

Net finance costs

110  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

2017

20,749
512

21,261

2016

19,011
308

19,319

2017  
£’000

2016  
£’000

93

13

(4,522)

(2,226)

(274)
(381)
(23)

(1,521)

(6,721)

(6,628)

(199)
(279)
(19)

(152)

(2,875)

(2,862)

9 Income tax

Current tax:

Current tax on profit for the period
Adjustments in respect of prior periods

Deferred tax:
Origination and reversal of temporary differences
Associated with pension deficit
Arising from change in tax rate
Adjustments in respect of prior periods

Income tax expense for the period

Other comprehensive income
Deferred tax in respect of actuarial valuation of retirement benefits
Corporation tax

The differences are reconciled below:

Profit before tax

Tax on profit calculated at standard rate for 2017 of 19.33% 
(2016: 20.00%)
Disallowed expenses and non-taxable income
Deferred tax on share options
Adjustments in respect of prior years
Arising from change in rate of tax
Exempt amounts

Total tax charge

2017  
£’000

4,780
(173)

4,607

(81)
–
(14)
(298)

(393)

4,214

517
–

517

2017  
£’000

18,406

3,558
642
(18)
(471)
(14)
517

4,214

2016  
£’000

5,319
(283)

5,036

(955)
69
(125)
(282)

(1,293)

3,743

(168)
(117)

(285)

2016  
£’000

17,659

3,532
901
–
(565)
(125)
–

3,743

Changes to the UK corporation tax rates were enacted as part of Finance Bill 2015 on 
18 November 2015. These included reductions to the main rate to reduce the rate to 19% from 
1 April 2017 and to 18% from 1 April 2020. A subsequent change to reduce the UK corporation 
tax rate to 17% from 1 April 2020 was enacted as part of Finance Bill 2016 on 6 September 2016.

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Amounts recognised in other comprehensive income

2017

Tax 
(expense) 
/benefit 
£’000

Before tax 
£’000

Net of tax 
£’000

Before tax 
£’000

2016

Tax 
(expense) 
/benefit 
£’000

Net of tax 
£’000

Remeasurements of post 
employment benefit obligations

3,039

(517)

2,522

(1,213)

285

(928)

10 Dividends

Final 2016 dividend of 6.80p (2015: 6.80p) per ordinary share
Interim 2017 dividend of 3.40p (2016: 3.40p) per ordinary share

2017  
£’000

7,832
3,916

11,748

2016  
£’000

7,120
3,916

11,036

The Directors are proposing a final 2017 dividend of 6.90 pence (2016: 6.80 pence) per share 
totalling £7,947,000 (2016: £7,832,000).

The proposed final dividend is subject to approval by shareholders passing a written resolution 
and accordingly has not been included as a liability in these financial statements.

111

Financial statements continued

Notes to the financial statements continued
for the 52 week period from 28 November 2016 to 26 November 2017

11 Earnings per share
Basic and diluted earnings per share are calculated by dividing the profit for the period 
attributable to shareholders by the weighted average number of shares.

12 Property, plant and equipment

Basic weighted average number of shares

Diluted weighted average number of shares

Profit attributable to ordinary shareholders (£’000)

Basic earnings per share

Diluted earnings per share

Adjusted earnings per share:
Profit attributable to ordinary shareholders (£’000)
Adjusting items (note 5)
Tax effect of adjustments

Profit after tax and before adjusting items

Basic adjusted earnings per share 

Diluted adjusted earnings per share 

2017  
£’000

 2016  
£’000

115,172,774

108,505,494

115,724,645

108,505,494

14,192

12.32p

12.26p

14,192
7,872
(1,014)

21,050

18.28p

18.19p

13,916

12.82p

12.82p

13,916
3,095
337

17,348

15.99p

15.99p

The difference between the basic and diluted average number of shares represents the 
dilutive effect of share options and warrants in existence.

The diluted weighted average number of ordinary shares is calculated as follows:

Ordinary shares in issue at the start of the period
Effect of shares issued for the Co-op acquisition (part year)
Effect of shares issued for the Co-op acquisition (full year)

108,505,494
–
6,667,280

Effect of shares to be issued for the Long-term incentive plan (LTIP)

115,172,774
551,871
Weighted average number of ordinary shares at the end of the period 115,724,645

104,712,042
3,793,452
–

108,505,494
–

108,505,494

 2017  
£’000

 2016  
£’000

Cost or valuation
At 30 November 2015
Additions
Acquired through business combinations
Classified as held for sale
Disposals
Transfers

At 27 November 2016

Additions
Acquired through business combinations
Classified as held for sale
Disposals

At 26 November 2017

Depreciation
At 30 November 2015
Charge for period
Eliminated on disposal
Impairment
Transfers
Classified as held for sale

At 27 November 2016

Charge for the period
Eliminated on disposal
Impairment
Classified as held for sale

At 26 November 2017

Carrying amount
At 26 November 2017

At 27 November 2016 

Land and 
buildings  
£’000

Furniture,  
fittings and 
equipment 
£’000

26,415
4,945
4,823
–
(5,159)
3,655

34,679

8,727
29,839
–
(5,242)

84,529
10,774
858
22
(2,122)
(3,655)

90,406

15,981
4,410
3,044
(3,690)

Total  
£’000

110,944
15,719
5,681
22
(7,281)
–

125,085

24,708
34,249
3,044
(8,932)

68,003

110,151

178,154

7,315
3,655
(131)
–
2,277
–

13,116

4,235
(274)
–
–

39,268
9,874
(1,628)
415
(2,277)
(466)

45,186

10,761
(1,525)
746
2,344

46,583
13,529
(1,759)
415
–
(466)

58,302

14,996
(1,799)
746
2,344

17,077

57,512

74,589

50,926
21,563

52,639
45,220

103,565
66,783

112  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

13 Assets classified as held for sale
Following a review of its portfolio in 2015, the Group decided to sell 97 of its stores. The Group 
continues to focus on the strategy of developing and expanding the convenience business 
and identified these stores as not being part of its long-term planning. As at year end 
27 November 2016 there were 75 stores remaining. During 2017 the Group sold 17, 17 are 
trading on, and 32 have been transferred to the closure programme, therefore these are  
no longer classified as held for sale, leaving nine remaining at the end of the period as  
held for sale. 

The Group has treated this disposal under IFRS 5 ‘Non-current Assets Held for Sale and 
Discontinued Operations’. 

IFRS 5 requires that the Group must not offset the gains and losses compared to fair value of 
the individual stores. However, on the basis that it is not practical to disclose the remaining 
nine individual assets held for sale, these have been disclosed in aggregate. 

The major classes of assets and liabilities of stores are as follows:

Property, plant and equipment
Inventories
Trade and other receivables

Total assets classified as held for sale

Trade and other payables
Provisions

Total liabilities as held for sale

Net assets classified as held for sale

Note

18
19

21
26

2017  
£’000

190
300
91

581

(468)
(362)

(830)

(249)

2016  
£’000

890
2,073
1,323

4,286

(4,840)
(297)

(5,137)

(851)

14 Intangible assets

Cost or valuation
At 30 November 2015
Additions
Fair value adjustment for goodwill
Deferred tax on fair value adjustment of land and buildings
Classified as held for sale

At 27 November 2016

Additions
Deferred tax on fair value adjustment of land and buildings
Fair value adjustment for goodwill

At 26 November 2017

Amortisation
At 30 November 2015
Amortisation charge
Net transferred from assets held for sale

At 27 November 2016

Amortisation charge

At 26 November 2017

Carrying amount
At 26 November 2017
At 27 November 2016 

Goodwill 
£’000

147,531
9,662
(1,410)
286
1,223

157,292

91,442
3,377
(560)

Other 
intangible 
assets  
£’000

5,706
166
–
–
–

5,872

929
–
–

Total  
£’000

153,237
9,828
(1,410)
286
1,223

163,164

92,371
3,377
(560)

251,551

6,801

258,352

3,518
–
716

4,234

–

4,234

247,317
153,058

3,803
776
–

4,579

640

5,219

1,582
1,293

7,321
776
716

8,813

640

9,453

248,899
154,351

The goodwill addition in the year includes £88,769,000 related to the acquisition of the  
298 Co-op stores (see note 17).

113

Financial statements continued

Notes to the financial statements continued
for the 52 week period from 28 November 2016 to 26 November 2017

14 Intangible assets continued
Goodwill acquired in a business combination is allocated, at acquisition, to the cash 
generating units (CGUs) that are expected to benefit from that business combination. 
Before recognition of impairment losses, the carrying amount of goodwill had been allocated 
as follows:

CGU 1

2017  
£’000

2016  
£’000

247,317

153,058

Since the IPO in 2014, McColl’s Retail Group has tested goodwill impairment annually on the 
basis of three cash generating units. They are:

Following a review of how the business is governed, structured, financed and how 
performance is assessed, Management have concluded that goodwill impairment be tested 
going forward on the basis of a single CGU. Key rationale is noted below:

•  The Board and senior management assess performance at a Group level, that is as a single 

operating segment (note 4), and not on the basis of historical CGU splits

•  Management are incentivised on the performance of the Group, which is the operation of 

convenience stores

•  Financing, and covenant testing of the financing, are applicable to the Group as a whole
•  Acquisitions, whether major or individual stores, bring synergies to the Group as a whole and 

are not specific to an individual store or acquired group of stores

•  The Group recently announced a new sole supply agreement to service all stores in 

•  CGU 1 – Goodwill arising from the 2005 Management buy-out including goodwill held at 

the Group

that time

•  CGU 2 – Goodwill relating to the 2008 Smile acquisition
•  CGU 3 – Goodwill acquired on all other acquisitions since the 2005 management buy-out

IAS 36 describes that a CGU is:

•  The smallest identifiable group of assets that generates cash inflows that are largely 

independent of the cash inflows from other assets or groups of assets;

•  Represents the lowest level within the entity at which the goodwill is monitored for internal 

management purposes; and

•  Not be larger than an operating segment determined in accordance with IFRS 8 

Operating Segments

If the above existing methodology was adopted the carrying amount of goodwill would have 
been allocated as follows:

CGU 1 
CGU 2
CGU 3

2017  
£’000

95,804
6,504
145,009

247,317

2016  
£’000

95,865
6,504
50,689

153,058

However, during 2017 the business underwent significant transformation, following both 
the integration of 298 stores from the Co-op and the announcement of a new sole supply 
agreement with Morrisons. 

The recoverable amount of the CGU is determined from value in use calculations with a 
discounted cash flow model used to calculate this amount. The key assumptions for the 
value in use calculation include the discount rate and long-term growth rates. The value 
in use calculations use forecast cash flows taking into account actual performance for 
2017. Cash flows beyond this period are extrapolated using a long-term growth rate of nil 
and discounted with a weighted average cost of capital (WACC) of 8.89% (2016: 12.05%). 
The change in WACC is driven by a change in capital structure, with an increase in debt  
and number of shares in issue.

As adjusted EBITDA pre the Co-op stores acquisition has been stable over several years, 
management consider a long-term growth rate of zero to be a prudent basis to extrapolate 
cash flows. The pre-tax discount rate is based on the Group’s weighted average cost of 
capital, taking into account the cost of capital and borrowings, to which specific market-
related premium adjustments are made.

The Group has conducted sensitivity analysis on the impairment testing for goodwill. 
With reasonable possible changes in key assumptions including a 2% change in WACC, 
management have concluded that the carrying amount of goodwill would exceed the 
value in use, both under the historical 3 CGU and new single CGU classifications.

15 Investments

Investments at cost

2017  
£’000

36

2016  
£’000

18

Investments have increased due to an increase in Nisa shares as a result of the Co-op 
store acquisition.

114  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Group subsidiaries
Details of the Group subsidiaries as at 26 November 2017 are as follows:

All are held by the Group unless stated. All subsidiaries are registered at the same address as McColl’s Retail Group plc, except for those registered in Scotland, whose registered address  
is Unit 11, The Avenue, Newton Mearns, Glasgow G77 6AA.

Name of subsidiary

A Harris Limited*
Birrell Limited*
Bracklands Limited*
Charnwait Management Limited*
Clark Retail Limited*
Dillons Stores Limited*
Farthingmist Limited*
Forbouys Limited*
Forbouys Services Limited*
Hargreaves Vending Limited*
ISS Limited*
Key Food Stores Limited*
Lavells Limited*
Lewis Meeson Limited*
Marshell Group Limited*
Martin CTN Group Limited*
Martin McColl Limited*
Martin McColl Group Limited*
Martin McColl Retail Limited*
Martin Retail Group Limited*
Martin the Newsagent Limited*
NSS Newsagents Limited*
NSS Newsagents Retail Limited*
Price Smasher Limited*
RS McColl (UK) Limited*
Smile Holdings Limited*
Smile Property Limited*
Smile Stores Limited*
Thistledove Limited*
TM Coffee Limited*
TM Group Limited*
TM Group Holdings Limited*

Principal activity

Dormant
Dormant 
Property Company
Retailing
Retailing
Retailing
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Corporate activities
Dormant 
Intermediate Holding Co
Dormant 
Dormant
Corporate activities
Dormant
Retailing
Dormant
Intermediate Holding Co
Retailing
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Intermediate Holding Co
Dormant
Intermediate Holding Co
Dormant
Retailing
Intermediate holding Co
Dormant
Dormant
Predecessor Holding Co

Registered office

Scotland 
Scotland 
Scotland
England and Wales
Scotland
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
Scotland
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales

Proportion of ownership interest 
and voting rights held 2017

Proportion of ownership interest 
and voting rights held 2016

100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%

100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%

115

Financial statements continued

Notes to the financial statements continued
for the 52 week period from 28 November 2016 to 26 November 2017

15 Investments continued

Name of subsidiary

TM Pension Trustees Limited*
TM Retail Limited*
TM Vending Limited*
Tog Limited*
Trents Leisure Limited*
Trimley Stores Limited*

* 

Indicates direct investment by the Company.

Principal activity

Dormant
Dormant
Corporate Activities
Intermediate Holding Co
Dormant
Dormant

Registered office

England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales

Proportion of ownership interest 
and voting rights held 2017

Proportion of ownership interest 
and voting rights held 2016

100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%

100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%

From the above table the following subsidiaries will take advantage of the audit exemption set out within section 479A of the Companies Act 2006 for the year ended 26 November 2017: 
Bracklands Limited, Charnwait Management Limited, Clark Retail Limited, Dillons Stores Limited, Martin McColl Limited, Martin McColl Retail Group Limited, Martin Retail Group Limited, Smile 
Stores Limited, Thistledove Limited, TM Group Holdings Limited, TM Vending Limited. All the subsidiaries are included on the Group’s consolidated financial statements for the period. The Group 
will guarantee the debts and liabilities of these UK subsidiaries at the balance sheet date in accordance with section 479C of the Companies Act 2006.

116  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

16 Business combinations
During the period, the Group made 12 acquisitions excluding the stores acquired from 
the Co-op, none of which was individually considered material to the Group. The cash 
consideration for these acquisitions and the assets acquired are summarised as follows:

Tangible fixed assets
Inventory 
Goodwill 
Deferred tax asset

Cash consideration

2017  
£’000

2,834
462
2,113
–

5,409

2016  
£’000

5,681
1,758
7,931
286

15,656

17 Business combinations – Co-op stores 
On 13 July 2016, the Group agreed to acquire 298 stores from the Co-op as an asset purchase 
for an aggregate consideration of £117m. The acquisition was integrated during 2017 by 
Martin McColl Limited, a wholly-owned subsidiary of the Group, by way of asset purchase. 
The principal activity of the acquired Co-op stores is convenience stores operating in the 
same market as the Group. The first store was acquired on 30 January 2017 with its first day of 
trading on 31 January 2017. The last store was acquired on 13 July 2017. The Co-op stores were 
acquired in order to grow the existing convenience estate.

The amounts recognised in respect of the identifiable assets acquired and liabilities assumed 
are as set out in the table below:

Assets and liabilities at date of acquisition
Property, plant and equipment
Financial liabilities

Total identifiable assets
Goodwill
Total consideration

Satisfied by:
Cash

2017  
£’000

31,415
(3,184)

28,231
88,769
117,000

117,000

18 Inventories

Finished goods and goods for resale
Classified as held for sale

19 Trade and other receivables

Trade receivables
Prepayment of Co-op acquisition expenses
Supplier rebates
Prepayments
Other receivables
Transferred to assets held for sale

Total current trade and other receivables

Ageing of past due but not impaired receivables

31 to 60 days
61 to 90 days
Greater than 90 days

Supplier rebates receivable ageing

31 to 60 days
61 to 90 days
Greater than 90 days 

Note

13

Note

13

2017  
£’000

76,265
(300)

75,965

2017  
£’000

1,945
–
24,746
6,972
6,238
(91)

39,810

2017  
£’000

318
509
376

1,203

2017  
£’000

1,299
818
621

2,738

The goodwill of £88,769,000 arising from the acquisition represents the difference between 
consideration transferred, and accounting of fair value of freeholds, fixtures and fittings 
and provisions relating to stock and dilapidations. None of the goodwill is expected to be 
deductible for income tax purposes.

The acquisition contributed £183,000,000 of sales and £3,900,000 of adjusted operating profit 
to the Group’s results for the part-year.

2016  
£’000

57,114
(2,073)

55,041

2016  
£’000

3,223
2,396
19,169
5,492
5,652
(1,323)

34,609

2016  
£’000

368
130
361

859

2016  
£’000

1,641
291
378

2,310

117

Financial statements continued

Notes to the financial statements continued
for the 52 week period from 28 November 2016 to 26 November 2017

20 Cash and cash equivalents

22 Loans and borrowings

Cash at bank and in hand

21 Trade and other payables

Trade payables
Accrued expenses
Holiday pay accrual
Social security and other taxes
Other payables
Accrued interest
Amounts due under hire purchase obligations
Classified as assets held for sale
Deferred income

2017  
£’000

14,273

2017  
£’000

119,400
27,432
1,281
9,321
1,925
394
1,799
(468)
4,385

2016  
£’000

3,757

2016  
£’000

98,784
22,195
1,043
5,268
3,078
274
1,469
(4,840)
2,750

Note

13

Non-current loans and borrowings
Bank borrowings
Unamortised issue costs

2017  
£’000

154,500
(1,532)

152,968

2016  
£’000

37,000
(1,039)

35,961

The long-term loans are secured by a fixed charge over the Group’s head office property 
together with a floating charge over the Group’s assets.

In July 2016, the Group completed a £100,000,000 term loan and an amended £100,000,000 
revolving facility with a £50,000,000 accordion. The current facility drawn as at 26 November 
2017 is £154,500,000 (2016: £37,000,000).

Details of loans and hire purchase obligations repayable within two to five years are as follows:

165,469

130,021

Term loan and revolving facility available until July 2021
Hire purchase obligations

Trade payables and accruals principally comprise amounts outstanding for trade purchases 
and ongoing costs. For most suppliers no interest is charged on the trade payables for the 
first 30 days from the date of the invoice. Thereafter, interest is charged on the outstanding 
balances at various interest rates. The Group has financial risk management policies in place 
to ensure that all payables are paid within the pre-agreed credit terms.

23 Non-current liabilities – other payables

The Directors consider that the carrying amount of trade payables approximates to their 
fair value.

Other payables and deferred income
Amounts due under hire purchase obligations

118  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

2017  
£’000

154,500
1,753

156,253

2017  
£’000

10,368
1,753

12,121

2016  
£’000

37,000
3,346

40,346

2016  
£’000

814
3,346

4,160

24 Net debt

Cash at bank and in hand

Term loan and revolving facility available until July 2021
Less: unamortised issue costs

Amounts due under hire purchase obligations

Note

20

2017  
£’000

14,273

14,273

(154,500)
1,532

(152,968)

(3,552)

(142,247)

2016  
£’000

3,757

3,757

(37,000)
1,039

(35,961)

(4,815)

(37,019)

Net debt

Analysis of net debt

Analysis of net debt
Cash and short-term deposits
Loans and borrowings
Finance lease liabilities

25 Leases and commitments 

2016  
£’000

3,757
(35,961)
(4,815)

(37,019)

Cash flow  
£’000

Other non-cash 
movements 
£’000

10,516
(117,500)
1,263

(105,721)

–
493
–

493

2017  
£’000

14,273
(152,968)
(3,552)

(142,247)

Operating leases
The Group leases various properties and equipment under non-cancellable operating leases. 
The terms of the property leases vary, with rent reviews every three to five years and many 
have break clauses.

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

As set out in note 4 property rental income earned during the year was £3,223,921 
(2016: £2,985,000). The majority of the properties held have committed tenants for the next 
three to five years. All operating lease contracts contain market review clauses in the event 
that the lessee exercises its option to renew. The lessee does not have an option to purchase 
the property at the expiry of the lease period.

At the balance sheet date, the Group had contracted with tenants for the following future 
minimum lease payments:

Within one year 
Within one to five years
After five years 

2017  
£’000

273
427
261

961

Finance leases
The Group acquires the majority of its motor vehicles and LED lighting under contract 
purchase agreements and such assets are generally classified as finance leases.

Future lease payments are due as follows:

Amounts due within one year
Amounts due within one to five years

Less future interest

2017  
£’000

1,882
1,840

3,722
(170)

3,552

2016  
£’000

351
654
292

1,297

2016  
£’000

1,041
1,990

3,031
(327)

2,704

The total future value of minimum lease payments is as follows:

Land and buildings 
Within one year
In two to five years
In over five years

2017  
£’000

2016  
£’000

32,185
100,441
117,885

250,511

26,933
84,231
99,572

210,736

Other financial commitments
In order to manage its exposure to fluctuating energy prices, during the year the Group 
entered into contracts to purchase 25.5 MW of electricity at a fixed price from Scottish 
Southern Electric (SSE). The contracts allow for a 10% over or underutilisation of the power 
contracted at the rates secured. While management acknowledge that the forward 
contracts in place are derivatives, they cannot be traded and are therefore treated 
as contracts that secure a pre-agreed price for electricity requirements to operate the 
stores portfolio.

119

Financial statements continued

Notes to the financial statements continued
for the 52 week period from 28 November 2016 to 26 November 2017

26 Provisions

At 28 November 2016 (including  
held for sale)
Additional provisions
Utilised during the period
Released unused
Unwinding of the discount included in 
provisions
Classified as held for sale 2016
Classified as held for sale 2017

At 26 November 2017

Non-current liabilities

Current liabilities

Note

Dilapidations 
£’000

Onerous 
contracts  
£’000

1,220
3,744
(922)
(295)

43
80
–

3,870

–

3,870

792
1,389
(385)
(420)

–
217
(362)

1,231

(593)

638

13

27 Deferred tax
Deferred tax assets and liabilities

2017

Pension benefit obligations
Revaluation of property, plant and equipment
Revaluation of intangible assets
Other items

Total  
£’000

2,012
5,133
(1,307)
(715)

43
297
(362)

5,101

2016

(593)

4,508

Pension benefit obligations
Revaluation of property, plant and equipment
Revaluation of intangible assets
Other items

Asset  
£’000

–
–
–
172

172

Asset  
£’000

–
–
–
–

–

Liability  
£’000

(1,744)
(3,174)
(3,610)
–

(8,528)

Liability  
£’000

(1,020)
(422)
(3,414)
–

(4,856)

Net deferred 
tax  
£’000

(1,744)
(3,174)
(3,610)
172

(8,356)

Net deferred 
tax  
£’000

(1,020)
(422)
(3,414)
–

(4,856)

Dilapidations
The provision includes estimates for certain properties for which the extent of the dilapidation 
has not been established. It is expected that most of these costs will be incurred in the next 
five years.

Onerous contracts
A provision is recognised for the present value of the unavoidable costs of the lease net of 
expected benefits for all leases that have been identified as onerous.

120  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

Deferred tax movement during the period

At 28 
November 2016 
£’000

Recognised in 
income  
£’000

Recognised 
in other 
comprehensive 
income  
£’000

Recognised in 
equity  
£’000

At 26 
November 
2017  
£’000

Pension benefit 
obligations
Revaluation of property, 
plant and equipment
Revaluation of intangible 
assets
Other items

Net tax assets/(liabilities)

(1,020)

(422)

(3,414)
–

(4,856)

(207)

733

(196)
101

431

(517)

–

(1,744)

(3,485)

(3,174)

–
71

(3,610)
172

(8,356)

(517)

(3,414)

–

–
–

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

29 Contingent liabilities
There are a number of contingent liabilities that arise in the normal course of business, which 
if realised, are not expected to result in a material liability to the Group. The Group recognises 
provisions for liabilities when it is more likely than not that a settlement will be required and the 
value of such a payment can be reliably estimated.

At 26 November 2017, the Group has the following contingent liabilities:

Certain subsidiaries of the Group have assigned UK property leases in the normal course of 
business. Should the assignees fail to fulfil any obligations in respect of these leases, members 
of the Group may be liable for those defaults. The Group cannot reliably quantify the amount 
of such contingent liabilities due to their uncertain nature. The number of such claims arising 
to date has been small and the liability, which is charged to the profit and loss account as it 
arises, has not been material.

On 22nd December 2017 the Group was found guilty of a health and safety breach at a store, 
and subsequently a fine was issued to the Group. 

Bank arrangement fee (to be paid on first draw down of new term loan)
Broker fee for acquisition to be paid after CMA approval has been obtained
Health and safety incident 

2017  
£’000

–
–
600

600

2016  
£’000

447
1,170
–

1,617

Deferred tax movement during the prior period is as follows:

At  
30 November  
2015  
£’000

Recognised in 
income  
£’000

Recognised 
in other 
comprehensive 
income  
£’000

Recognised in 
equity  
£’000

At  
27 November  
2016  
£’000

Pension benefit 
obligations
Revaluation of property, 
plant and equipment
Revaluation of intangible 
assets
Other items

Net tax assets/(liabilities)

(1,119)

(827)

(4,279)
194

(6,031)

(69)

691

865
(167)

1,320

151

–

–
–

151

17

(1,020)

(286)

–
(27)

(296)

(422)

(3,414)
–

(4,856)

Deferred tax has arisen owing to accelerated capital allowances, business combinations, 
pension deficit/surplus and other temporary differences and also in respect of the taxable 
gains arising on the disposal of intangible fixed assets where the gains have been rolled into 
replacement assets. 

Deferred tax at 26 November 2017 has been measured at 17% (2016: 17%) being the tax rate 
enacted at the balance sheet date expected to be effective for future periods.

28 Authorised, issued and fully paid share capital

Issued ordinary shares of £0.001 at 28 November 2016

Issued ordinary shares of £0.001 at 26 November 2017

115,172,774

115,172,774

115

115

12,579

12,579

Number 
of shares

Share capital 
£’000

Share premium 
£’000

Voting rights
The ordinary shares rank equally for voting purposes. On a show of hands each shareholder 
has one vote and on a poll each shareholder has one vote per ordinary share held. 
Each ordinary share ranks equally for any dividend declared. Each ordinary share ranks 
equally for any distributions made on a winding up of the Group. Each ordinary share ranks 
equally in the right to receive a relative proportion of shares in the event of a capitalisation 
of reserves.

121

Financial statements continued

Notes to the financial statements continued
for the 52 week period from 28 November 2016 to 26 November 2017

30 Financial instruments and risk management

Derivatives and other financial instruments
The Group’s principal financial instruments comprise loans, cash and short-term deposits.

The main purpose of these financial instruments is to raise finance for the Group’s operations. 
The Group has various other financial instruments such as trade and other receivables and 
trade and other payables that arise directly from its operations.

On 13 July 2016 the Group completed and signed an amended £100,000,000 revolving 
credit facility and a £50,000,000 accordion facility for the Group. The new facility will be 
in place until July 2021. The current facility drawn as at 26 November 2017 is £57,000,000 
(2016: £37,000,000).

On the same date, the Group completed a £100,000,000 term loan agreement for the 
purchase of 298 stores from the Co-op. At 26 November 2017, £97,500,000 had been drawn 
with £2,500,000 repaid per the terms of the agreement. Total drawings as at 26 November 
2017 were £154,500,000.

Interest rate risk
The Group is exposed to interest rate risk from its use of interest bearing financial instruments. 
This is a market risk that the fair value or future cash flows of a financial instrument will fluctuate 
because of changes in interest rates. There are no financial instruments held at level 1, 2 or 3 
fair value.

Floating rate financial liabilities on which interest is paid bear interest at rates based on one 
month LIBOR. It is the Group’s policy to consider the need for interest rate hedging on an 
ongoing basis. No interest rate hedging is currently in place although this is kept under review 
by management.

Interest rate risk profile of financial liabilities and assets
The interest rate profile of the financial liabilities of the Group is as follows:

Fixed rate financial liabilities 
Floating rate financial liabilities
Financial liabilities on which no interest is paid 

Financial liabilities

2017  
£’000

1,836
156,216
165,185

323,237

2016  
£’000

2,705
39,109
128,938

170,752

122  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

The floating rate financial liabilities comprise a sterling designated working capital facility 
and hire purchase borrowings. The interest rate profile of the financial assets of the Group 
is as follows:

Financial assets on which no interest is paid

2017  
£’000

54,692

2016  
£’000

42,678

If interest rates had been 0.5% higher during the period ended 26 November 2017, with 
all other variables held constant, the post-tax profit for the period would have been 
approximately £339,000 lower (2016: £300,000 lower) as a result of higher interest expense.

Liquidity risk
Liquidity risk arises from the Group’s management of working capital and the finance charges 
on its debt instruments and repayments of principal. It is the risk that the Group will encounter 
difficulty in meeting its financial obligations as they fall due. Management carries out daily 
cash forecasts covering the next three to four periods. In addition management considers 
liquidity as part of the annual budgeting and long-term planning process.

The Group’s objective is to maintain a balance between continuity of funding and flexibility 
through the use of overdrafts and credit facilities to ensure that it will always have sufficient 
cash to allow it to meet its liabilities when they become due.

Maturity of financial liabilities
The maturity profile of the Group’s financial liabilities based on the remaining period at the 
balance sheet date to the contractual maturity date, was as follows:

Up to 3 months or on demand
In 3 – 12 months
In more than one year but not more than two years
In more than two years but not more than five years
In more than five years

2017  
£’000

155,268
1,349
3,561
162,778
282

323,238

2016  
£’000

128,526
1,208
2,047
38,971
–

170,752

The disclosures above are the contractual undiscounted cash flows and exclude unamortised 
finance costs.

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Capital disclosures
The Group’s objectives when maintaining capital are to safeguard the entity’s ability 
to continue as a going concern and to provide an adequate return to shareholders. 
Capital comprises the Group’s equity i.e. share capital including share premium and retained 
earnings, excluding pension asset and liability.

The Group’s net debt to capital ratio is as follows:

Net debt
Total equity (as defined above)

Debt to capital ratio

2017  
£’000

142,247
135,651

1.05

2016  
£’000

37,019
134,404

0.28

Borrowing facilities
The Group had certain borrowing facilities available to it for general working capital 
requirements of which £57,000,000 has been drawn at 26 November 2017 (2016: £37,000,000).

Credit risk
Given the nature of the Group’s operations, credit risk is not considered significant and arises 
mainly from cash deposits held with banks and financial institutions which have a good credit 
rating. Credit risk also arises from trade and other receivables which comprise amounts due 
from credit card institutions and rebates due from suppliers.

Set out below is a comparison by category of carrying values and fair values of all the Group’s 
financial assets and financial liabilities:

Financial liabilities
Trade and other short-term payables
Hire purchase borrowings
Long-term borrowings
Long-term payables

Financial assets
Other investments carried at cost
Classified as loans and receivables
Short-term receivables
Cash and short-term deposits

26 November 2017

27 November 2016

Carrying value 
£’000

Fair value 
£’000

Carrying value 
£’000

Fair value  
£’000

(154,818)
(3,552)
(154,500)
(10,368)

(154,818)
(3,552)
(154,500)
(10,368)

(323,238)

(323,238)

(128,123)
(4,815)
(37,000)
(814)

(170,752)

(128,123)
(4,815)
(37,000)
(814)

(170,752)

36

36

18

18

40,393
14,273

54,702

40,393
14,273

54,702

38,903
3,757

42,678

38,903
3,757

42,678

The long-term rating for all financial institution counter parties ranges from AAA to Baa1 per 
Moody’s rating scale.

123

Financial statements continued

Notes to the financial statements continued
for the 52 week period from 28 November 2016 to 26 November 2017

31 Retirement benefit schemes
The Group accounts for pensions in accordance with IAS19 revised.

The Group operates two defined benefit pension schemes in the UK, the TM Group Pension 
Scheme and the TM Pension Plan, in addition to several defined contribution schemes which 
require contributions to be made to separately administered funds. Pension costs for defined 
contribution schemes were £1,559,000 (2016: £1,409,000).

The two defined benefit pension schemes are subject to the UK regulatory framework for 
pensions, including the Scheme Specific Funding requirements. The schemes are operated 
under trust and, as such, the trustees of the schemes are responsible for operating the 
schemes and they have a statutory responsibility to act in accordance with the Trust 
Deed and Rules, in the best interest of the beneficiaries of the schemes, and UK legislation 
(including Trust Law).

The nature of the schemes exposes the Group to the risk of paying unanticipated additional 
contributions to the schemes in times of adverse experience. The most financially significant 
risks are likely to be:

•  Members living for longer than expected;
•  Higher than expected actual inflation;
•  Lower than expected investment returns; and
•  The risk that movements in the value of the schemes’ liabilities are not met by corresponding 

movements in the value of the schemes’ assets

The sensitivity analysis disclosed is intended to provide an indication on the impact on the 
value of the schemes’ liabilities of the risks highlighted.

The ongoing funding position of the schemes are formally assessed on a triennial basis by an 
independent qualified actuary. The results of the valuation are used by the Group and the 
trustees of the schemes to agree a contribution schedule as required. Further details are set 
out in the valuation documentation.

The last completed triennial full actuarial valuation of the schemes was carried out at 
31 March 2016. Deficit repair contributions were agreed at £944,000 p.a. from 1 April 2017, 
£1,150,000 p.a. from 1 April 2018, and £1,400,000 p.a. from 1 April 2019 to November 2025, 
index-linked, and subject to review at future valuations. Additional contributions were agreed 
towards the costs of running the schemes.

The figures for this financial information have been based, in accordance with IAS19, on 
valuations using the projected unit method.

124  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

The disclosures are based upon the preliminary valuation of the schemes which were carried 
out as at 31 March 2016, updated to 26 November 2017 by qualified independent actuaries. 
The main assumptions when valuing the assets and liabilities of the schemes under IAS19 
revised are as follows:

RPI inflation
CPI inflation
Rate of increase in pensionable salaries
Rate of increase to pensions in payment:
5% LPI
2.5% LPI

Discount rate

Group pension schemes

2017  
%pa

3.15
2.15
n/a

3.05
2.15

2.60

2016  
%pa

3.25
2.25
n/a

3.15
2.20

2.90

None of the Group’s own financial instruments or properties, either held or occupied by the 
Group, are held as assets within either schemes.

Demographic assumptions

Life expectancy of a pensioner 
aged 65 – male
Life expectancy of a pensioner 
aged 65 – female
Life expectancy at age 65 for someone 
aged 45 – male
Life expectancy at age 65 for someone 
aged 45 – female

Notes to the balance sheet

Fair value of scheme assets
Present value of funded scheme 
obligations

Net pension asset/(liability)

TM Group Pension Scheme

TM Pension Plan

2017  
years

2016  
years

2017  
years

2016  
years

87.0

88.9

88.5

90.6

87.0

89.0

89.4

90.6

87.2

88.9

88.4

90.5

87.1

88.8

89.5

90.4

TM Group Pension Scheme

TM Pension Plan

2017  
£’000

89,097

(75,488)

13,609

2016  
£’000

89,249

(78,303)

10,946

2017  
£’000

48,104

(51,456)

(3,352)

2016  
£’000

46,791

(51,635)

(4,844)

On its balance sheet, the Group recognises £13,609,000 surplus in respect of the TM Group 
Pension Scheme. Under IAS 19, the Group as employer is allowed to do this as it has 
unconditional right to any surplus once the last Group benefits have been paid.

Notes to the income statement

Current service cost including 
administration expenses
Net interest on defined benefit asset

Total included in ‘staff costs’

TM Group Pension Scheme

TM Pension Plan

2017  
£’000

290
(319)

(29)

2016  
£’000

299
(357)

(58)

2017  
£’000

2016  
£’000

284
128

412

383
108

491

TM Group Pension Scheme

TM Pension Plan

Recognition of defined benefit obligation

Opening defined benefit obligation
Service costs
Interest cost on defined benefit 
obligation
Losses due to changes in 
demographic assumptions
Losses due to changes  
in financial assumptions
Losses/(gains) due to plan experience
Benefits paid including expenses

Closing defined benefit obligation

Notes to the statement of 
comprehensive income (SCI)

Return on assets excluding amounts 
included in net interest
Losses due to changes in demographic 
assumptions
Gains due to changes in financial 
assumptions
Gains due to plan experience

Total recognised in SCI

2017  
£’000

3,910

1,095

(2,415)
(339)

2,251

2016  
£’000

2017  
£’000

2016  
£’000

7,137

3,070

3,462

–

268

–

Recognition of defined benefit obligation

(7,349)
841

629

(1,641)
(909)

788

(5,705)
497

(1,746)

Opening fair value of scheme assets
Interest income on scheme assets
Employer contributions
Return on assets excluding amounts 
included in net interest
Benefits paid including expenses

Closing fair value of scheme assets

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

TM Group Pension Scheme

TM Pension Plan

2017  
£’000

78,303
290

2016  
£’000

73,479
299

2017  
£’000

51,635
284

2016  
£’000

47,385
383

2,182

2,510

1,438

1,623

–

–

–

–

1,320
339
(6,946)

75,488

7,349
(841)
(4,493)

78,303

1,373
909
(4,183)

51,456

TM Group Pension Scheme

TM Pension Plan

2017  
£’000

89,249
2,501
383

3,910
(6,946)

89,097

2016  
£’000

83,285
2,867
453

7,137
(4,493)

89,249

2017  
£’000

46,791
1,310
1,116

3,070
(4,183)

48,104

5,705
(497)
(2,964)

51,635

2016  
£’000

43,701
1,515
1,077

3,462
(2,964)

46,791

125

Financial statements continued

Notes to the financial statements continued
for the 52 week period from 28 November 2016 to 26 November 2017

31 Retirement benefit schemes continued
The Group expects to contribute £297,000 to the TM Group Pension Scheme and £1,318,000 to 
the TM Pension plan in the period ended 25 November 2018.

Policy for recognising actuarial gains and losses
The Group recognises actuarial gains and losses immediately in the statement of 
comprehensive income.

The major categories of scheme assets as a percentage of total scheme assets are as follows:

Sensitivity analysis

TM Group Pension Scheme

TM Pension Plan

Equity securities
Debt securities – Corporate
Debt securities – Government
Real estate
Cash and cash equivalents

2017 
£’000

623
57,012
25,655
4,207
1,600

89,097

TM Group Pension Scheme

2017  
%

1%
63%
29%
5%
2%

100%

2016  
£’000

15,736
42,010
20,336
4,022
7,145

89,249

2016  
%

18%
46%
23%
5%
8%

100%

Change in assumptions 
compared with 26 November 2017 and 
27 November 2016 actuarial assumptions

0.5% decrease in discount rate
1 year increase in member life 
expectation
0.5% decrease in inflation (including 
impact of pension increases)

Change in 
actuarial 
value of 
liabilities on 
2017  
£’000

Change in 
actuarial 
value of 
liabilities on 
2016  
£’000

Change in 
actuarial 
value of 
liabilities on 
2017  
£’000

Change in 
actuarial 
value of 
liabilities on 
2016  
£’000

5,355

3,020

2,351

5,544

3,132

(2,297)

4,071

2,058

2,746

4,018

2,065

(2,467)

The sensitivities disclosed are calculated using approximate methods taking into account 
the weighted average duration of the schemes’ liabilities (13 years for the TM Group Pension 
Scheme and 14 years for the TM Pension Plan). This is the same approach as in previous years.

The major categories of scheme assets as a percentage of total scheme assets are as follows:

Equity securities
Debt securities – Corporate
Debt securities – Government
Real estate
Cash and cash equivalents

2017 
£’000

608
23,802
10,510
11,905
1,279

48,104

TM Group Pension Plan

2017  
%

1%
49%
22%
25%
3%

100%

2016  
£’000

21,286
14,610
4,925
4,022
1,948

46,791

2016  
%

45%
31%
11%
9%
4%

100%

The investment strategy of the schemes is driven by their liability profiles. The assets of the 
schemes are managed by an independent pension and investment consultant. The schemes 
invest in different types of bonds (including corporate and government bonds) in order to 
align movements in the value of their assets with movements in their liabilities arising from 
changes in market conditions.

126  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

32 Share-based payments
The Group makes equity settled share awards to Executive Directors and employees under 
two different share option plans. Further details of the plans and amounts recognised in 
respect of these are provided below:

Long-term incentive plan (LTIP)

Scheme details and movements
The plan provides for annual awards of performance shares to eligible participants. 
Vesting is based on 3-year performance. Executive Directors’ vested shares will be subject 
to an additional 2-year holding period before being released to participants. Options are 
exercisable at a price of £0.001. The Remuneration Committee has discretion to reduce any 
un-vested long-term incentive awards (including those in a holding period), or to vary the 
opportunities for future awards, in case of serious financial misstatement or gross misconduct. 
In extreme cases of gross misconduct, the Committee may claw back vested long-term 
incentive awards. Participants are eligible to receive cash or shares equal to the value of 
dividends that would have been paid over the vesting period on shares that vest. 

Awards will vest on achievement of financial performance measures, measured over a three-
year performance period, to include both earnings per share (EPS) and total shareholder 
return (TSR). EPS will receive a weighting in the LTIP of at least 50%. For all grants to date the 
weightings on EPS and TSR were 70% and 30% respectively. TSR will be measured on a relative 
basis against a relevant peer Group. Other measures may be considered in future years to 
help capture the strategic goals of the business and may be used in conjunction with these 
metrics. Nothing will vest below threshold. 25% of each element will vest for achievement of 
threshold performance under each metric, then increase on a straight-line basis to full vesting 
for achieving stretch performance. The Committee has discretion to adjust the formulaic LTIP 
award downwards (or upwards with shareholder consultation), within the limits of the plan, to 
ensure alignment of pay with the underlying performance of the business.

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

The movements in the number of share options during the period were as follows:

Outstanding, start of period
Granted during the period
Forfeited during the period

Outstanding, end of period

2017  

Number

1,410,740
778,221
(200,751)

1,988,210

2016  
Number

607,431
803,309
–

1,410,740

The movements in the weighted average exercise price of share options during the period 
were as follows:

Outstanding, start of period
Granted during the period
Forfeited during the period
Outstanding, end of period

2017  
£’000

1.58
1.86
1.48
1.70

2016  
£’000

1.48
1.68
–
1.58

No share options were exercised during the period.

Outstanding share options
Details of share options outstanding at the end of the period are as follows:

Weighted average exercise price (£)
Number of share options outstanding
Expected weighted average remaining life (years)

The contractual weighted average remaining life is 1.63 years.

The exercise price range is £1.48 to £1.86.

2017

1.70
1,988,210
1.63

2016

1.58
1,410,740
1.13

Fair value of options granted
The weighted average fair value of options granted during the period at measurement date 
was £nil (2016: £nil).

The weighted average fair value per TSR unit (excluding dividends) of options granted during 
the period at measurement date was £1.04.

127

Financial statements continued

Notes to the financial statements continued
for the 52 week period from 28 November 2016 to 26 November 2017

32 Share-based payments continued
The following table gives the assumptions applied to the options granted in the respective 
periods shown. No assumption has been made to incorporate the effects of expected early 
exercise. The main inputs are set out in the table below. The date of grant of the options was 
15 March 2017 (2016: 11 April 2016 and 6 April 2017).

Exercise price of option (£)
Share price at date of grant (£)
Expected volatility (%)
Vesting period in years
Option life in years
Expected life of option in practice in years
Expected dividends, expressed as a dividend yield (%)
Risk-free interest rate (%)
Number of employees subject to option grant
Number of shares covered by option

2017

1.86
1.86
35.00
3.00
3.00
3.00
5.48
0.06
9.00
778,221

2016

1.68
1.68
33.46
3.00
3.00
3.00
6.08
0.33
6.00
803,309

2015

1.49
1.49
26.50
3.00
3.00
3.00
–
0.68
1.00
406,680

Volatility is a measure of the amount by which a price is expected to fluctuate during 
a period. This is based on an historical analysis of the volatility of McColl’s total return to 
shareholders as measured daily over a historic period commensurate with the remaining 
performance period at date of grant.

Risk free rate is the yield to maturity on the date of grant on zero-coupon UK Government 
bond with a term commensurate with the remaining performance period at date of grant. 

McColl’s embedded performance is based on TSR performance banked over the period 
from the start of the averaging period to the date of grant. 

Comparators embedded performance is based on the TSR performance banked by each 
LTIP comparator over the period from the start of the averaging period to the date of grant. 

Correlation is based on an historical analysis of the average TSR correlation observed across 
the LTIP comparator Group as measured fortnightly over a historic period commensurate with 
the remaining performance period at date of grant.

The fair value of services received during the period were the tenure of employment. 

128  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

IFRS 2 requires that TSR-vesting shares under McColl’s LTIP awards be expensed based 
on fair value, taking into account the probability of achieving the market-based vesting 
condition (relative TSR). The probability of achieving the vesting condition is influenced by the 
performance already delivered between the start of the share price averaging period and 
the date of grant. McColl’s has used a Monte-Carlo simulation model to determine the grant-
date fair value of performance shares for the TSR element of the scheme. Each Monte-Carlo 
iteration calculates the future value of a performance share by projecting forward a future 
TSR scenario for each of its TSR comparators. Valuations are based on the average of 10,000 
iterations of the Monte-Carlo model. 

Charge/credit arising from share-based payments
The total charge for the year for share-based payments was £392,818 (2016: £nil), of which 
£392,818 (2016: £nil) related to equity-settled share-based payment transactions.

The carrying value of the liability arising from share-based payments was £392,818 (2016: £nil).

Group share option scheme (CSOPS) 

Scheme details and movements
The scheme began operation in August 2015. The scheme meets the criteria of an equity 
settled share-based payment as the entity receives goods or services as consideration for 
its own equity instruments (including shares or share options). Equity-settled share-based 
payments are measured at fair value at the date of grant. The fair value determined at 
the date of grant is expensed on a straight-line basis over the vesting period, based on 
the Group’s estimate of shares that will eventually vest. Performance conditions are 100% 
dependent on reaching an EPS growth targets which are consistent with LTIP performance 
conditions, these are detailed in the remuneration report on page 81. EPS is a non-market 
based vesting condition and therefore fair value is determined based upon the probability 
of achieving the target.

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

The movements in the number of CSOP share options during the period were as follows:

Outstanding, start of period
Granted during the period
Forfeited during the period

Outstanding, end of period

2017  

Number

287,958
176,064
(24,687)

439,355

2016  
Number

160,455
152,106
(24,603)

287,958

The movements in the weighted average exercise price of CSOP share options during the 
period were as follows:

33 Related party transactions
Only the Directors are deemed to be key management personnel. All transactions between 
Directors and the Group are on an arm’s length basis and no period end balances have 
arisen as a result of these transactions.

Salaries and other short-term employee benefits
Share-based payments

2017  
£’000

1,793
228

2,021

2016  
£’000

2,068
–

2,068

Outstanding, start of period
Granted during the period
Forfeited during the period
Outstanding, end of period

2017  
£’000

1.57
1.86
1.62
1.68

2016  
£’000

1.48
1.66
1.52
1.57

There were no material transactions or balances between the Group and its key 
management personnel or members of their close family.

34 Subsequent events 
Management has evaluated subsequent events through 18 February 2018, which is the date 
the consolidated financial statements were available to be issued. There were no subsequent 
events that required adjustment to, or disclosure in, the Group financial statements.

No options were exercised during the period.

Outstanding share options
Details of share options outstanding at the end of the period are as follows:

Weighted average exercise price (£)
Number of share options outstanding
Expected weighted average remaining life (years)

The contractual weighted average remaining life is 1.54 years.

The exercise price range is £1.48 to £1.86.

2017

1.68
439,355
1.54

2016

1.52
287,958
1.05

Charge/credit arising from share-based payments
The total charge for the year for CSOP share-based payments was £43,050 (2016: £nil), of 
which £43,050 (2016: £nil) related to equity-settled share-based payment transactions.

The carrying value of the liability arising from share-based payments was £43,050 (2016: £nil).

129

Financial statements continued

Company statement of financial position
for the 52 week period from 28 November 2016 to 26 November 2017

Company statement of changes in equity
for the 52 week period from 28 November 2016 to 26 November 2017

Non-current assets
Investments

Total non-current assets

Current assets
Trade and other receivables

Total current assets and net assets 

Total assets

Shareholders’ equity
Equity share capital
Share premium account
Retained earnings1

Note

C4

C5

C6
C6

2017 
£’000

77 

77 

59,367 

59,367

59,444 

115 
12,579 
46,750 

59,444

2016 
£’000 

77 

77 

68,093 

68,093 

68,170 

115 
12,579 
55,476 

68,170 

1 

Included within Retained earnings and other reserves is profit of £3,022,000 (2016: £3,166,000).

These financial statements of McColl’s Retail Group plc registered number 08783477 were 
approved and authorised for issue by the Board on 18 February 2018 and signed on its 
behalf by:

As at 28 November 2016
Profit for the period
Dividends paid

As at 26 November 2017

As at 30 November 2015
Share premium transfer to retained 
earnings
Issue of share capital
Profit for the period
Dividends paid

As at 27 November 2016

Called up  
share  
capital  
£’000

115 
–
–

115 

Called up  
share  
capital  
£’000

105

10
–
–

115

Share  
premium 
account  
£’000 

12,579 
–
–

12,579 

Share  
premium 
account  
£’000

47,836

(47,836)
12,579
–
–

12,579

Profit  
and loss 
account  
£’000 

55,476 
3,022 
(11,748)

46,750

Profit  
and loss 
account  
£’000

15,510

47,836
–
3,166
(11,036)

55,476

Total  
£’000 

68,170 
3,022
(11,748)

59,444 

Total  
£’000 

63,451

–
12,589
3,166
(11,036)

68,170

Simon Fuller
Director

130  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Notes to the Company financial statements
for the 52 week period from 28 November 2016 to 26 November 2017

C1. Basis of preparation
The Company’s financial period is the period from 28 November 2016 to 26 November 2017.

The parent company financial statements have been prepared in accordance with Financial 
Reporting Standard 101, ‘Reduced Disclosure Framework’ (FRS 101) and the Companies Act 
2006 (the ‘Act’). FRS 101 sets out a reduced disclosure framework for a ‘qualifying entity’ as 
defined in the standard which addresses the financial reporting requirements and disclosure 
exemptions in the individual financial statements of qualifying entities that otherwise apply 
the recognition, measurement and disclosure requirements of EU-adopted IFRS.

As permitted by FRS 101, the Company has taken advantage of the disclosure exemptions 
available under that standard in relation to business combinations, financial instruments, 
capital management, presentation of comparative information in respect of share capital, 
tangible fixed assets and intangible assets, presentation of a cash flow statement and 
related notes, standards not yet effective, impairment of assets, disclosures in respect 
of the compensation of key management personnel and related party transactions. 
Where required, equivalent disclosures are given in the consolidated financial statements of 
McColl’s plc.

The parent company financial statements are prepared on a going concern basis as set 
out in note 2 of the consolidated financial statements of the Group. The Directors have 
taken advantage of the exemption available under Section 408 of the Companies Act 2006 
and not presented an Income statement or a statement of comprehensive income for the 
Company alone.

A summary of the Company’s significant accounting policies is set out below:

Deferred taxation 
Deferred tax is accounted for on the basis of temporary differences arising from differences 
between the tax base and accounting base of assets and liabilities.

Deferred tax is recognised for all temporary differences, except to the extent where a 
deferred tax liability arises from the initial recognition of goodwill or from the initial recognition 
of an asset or a liability in a transaction that is not a business combination and, at the time of 
transaction, affects neither accounting profit nor taxable profit. It is determined using tax rates 
and laws that have been enacted or substantively enacted by the balance sheet date and 
are expected to apply when the related deferred income tax asset is realised or the deferred 
income tax liability is settled.

Deferred tax assets are recognised only to the extent that the Directors consider that, on the 
basis of all available evidence, it is probable that there will be suitable future taxable profits 
from which the future reversal of the underlying differences can be deducted.

Deferred tax is charged or credited to the income statement, except when it relates to items 
charged or credited directly to equity or other comprehensive income, in which case the 
deferred tax is also dealt with in equity or other comprehensive income respectively.

C3. Staff costs including Directors’ remuneration
The average number of employees (all Executive Directors of the Company) during the 
financial year was three (2016: three).

The Schedule 5 requirements of SI 2008/410 for Executive Directors’ remuneration are included 
within the Remuneration Report on pages 68 to 85.

C2. Significant accounting policies

Investments
Fixed asset investments are shown at cost less provision for impairment.

Taxation 

Current taxation
Current tax is provided at amounts expected to be paid using the tax rates and laws that 
have been enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date. Current tax is 
charged or credited to the income statement, except when it relates to items charged to 
equity or other comprehensive income, in which case the current tax is also dealt with in 
equity or other comprehensive income respectively.

131

Financial statements continued

Notes to the Company financial statements continued
for the 52 week period from 28 November 2016 to 26 November 2017

C4. Investments

Shares in subsidiaries

Investments

2017 
£’000

77 

2016 
£’000 

77 

The carrying value of the investment in subsidiary undertakings has been reviewed at 26 November 2017 and no impairment charge is required.

The following information relates to all UK subsidiary undertakings of the Group during the period:

All subsidiaries are held by the Company unless stated. All subsidiaries are registered at the same address as McColl’s Retail Group plc, except for those registered in Scotland, whose 
registered address is Unit 11, The Avenue, Newton Mearns, Glasgow G77 6AA.

Principal activity

Dormant
Dormant 
Property Company
Retailing
Retailing
Retailing
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Corporate activities
Dormant 
Intermediate Holding Co
Dormant 
Dormant
Corporate activities
Dormant
Retailing
Dormant
Intermediate Holding Co
Retailing
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant

Registered office

Scotland 
Scotland 
Scotland
England and Wales
Scotland
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
Scotland
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales

Proportion of ownership interest 
and voting rights held 2017

Proportion of ownership interest 
and voting rights held 2016

100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%

100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%

Name of subsidiary

A Harris Limited
Birrell Limited
Bracklands Limited
Charnwait Management Limited
Clark Retail Limited
Dillons Stores Limited
Farthingmist Limited
Forbouys Limited
Forbouys Services Limited
Hargreaves Vending Limited
ISS Limited
Key Food Stores Limited
Lavells Limited
Lewis Meeson Limited
Marshell Group Limited
Martin CTN Group Limited
Martin McColl Limited
Martin McColl Group Limited
Martin McColl Retail Limited
Martin Retail Group Limited
Martin the Newsagent Limited
NSS Newsagents Limited
NSS Newsagents Retail Limited

132  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Name of subsidiary

Price Smasher Limited
RS McColl (UK) Limited
Smile Holdings Limited
Smile Property Limited
Smile Stores Limited
Thistledove Limited
TM Coffee Limited
TM Group Limited
TM Group Holdings Limited
TM Pension Trustees Limited
TM Retail Limited
TM Vending Limited
Tog Limited
Trents Leisure Limited
Trimley Stores Limited

Principal activity

Intermediate Holding Co
Dormant
Intermediate Holding Co
Dormant
Retailing
Intermediate holding Co
Dormant
Dormant
Predecessor Holding Co
Dormant
Dormant
Corporate Activities
Intermediate Holding Co
Dormant
Dormant

Registered office

England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales
England and Wales

Proportion of ownership interest 
and voting rights held 2017

Proportion of ownership interest 
and voting rights held 2016

100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%

100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%

From the above table the following subsidiaries will take advantage of the audit exemption set out within section 479A of the Companies Act 2006 for the year ended 26 November 2017: 
Bracklands Limited, Charnwait Management Limited, Clark Retail Limited, Dillons Stores Limited, Martin McColl Limited, Martin McColl Retail Group Limited, Martin Retail Group Limited, Smile 
Stores Limited, Thistledove Limited, TM Group Holdings Limited, TM Vending Limited. All the subsidiaries are included on the Groups consolidated financial statements for the period. The Group 
will guarantee the debts and liabilities of these below UK subsidiaries at the balance sheet date in accordance with section 479C of the Companies Act 2006.

133

Financial statements continued

Notes to the Company financial statements continued
for the 52 week period from 28 November 2016 to 26 November 2017

C5. Trade and other receivables

Amounts owed by Group undertakings

C6. Authorised, issued and fully paid share capital

Issued ordinary shares of £0.001 each  
as at 28 November 2016

Issued ordinary shares of £0.001 each  
as at 26 November 2017

2017 
£’000

59,367

2016 
£’000 

68,093 

Number 
of shares

115,172,774 

115,172,774 

 Share  
capital  
£’000

Share  
premium  
£’000 

115 

115 

12,579 

12,579

C7. Dividends paid and proposed 
The Board has recommended a final dividend of 6.9 pence per share (2016: 6.8p), totalling 
£7,947,000, subject to shareholder approval at the Annual General Meeting to be held 
on 12 April 2018. The final dividend will be paid on 1 June 2018 to those shareholders on 
the register at the close of business on 20 April 2018. The payment of this dividend will not 
have any tax consequences for the Group. The interim dividend, declared and paid, was 
3.4 pence per share (2016: 3.4p), totalling £3,916,000.

Declared and paid during the year:
Equity dividends on ordinary shares:

Final dividend for 2016: 6.8p (2015: 6.8p)
Interim for 2017: 3.4p (2016: 3.4p)

Dividends paid

Proposed for approval by shareholders at the AGM: 
Final dividend for 2017: 6.9p (2016: 6.8p)

2017 
£’000

2016 
£’000 

 7,832 
 3,916 

 11,748 

 7,120 
 3,916 

 11,036 

 7,947 

 7,120 

The proposed final dividend is subject to approval by shareholders passing a written resolution 
and accordingly has not been included as a liability in these financial statements.

134  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

Strategic report

Governance

Financial statements

Glossary of terms

Introduction 
In the reporting of financial information, the Directors have adopted various Alternative 
Performance Measures (APMs) of financial performance, position or cash flows other than 
those defined or specified under International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS).

These measures are not defined by IFRS and therefore may not be directly comparable with 
other companies’ APMs, including those in the Group’s industry. 

APMs should be considered in addition to IFRS measures and are not intended to be a 
substitute for IFRS measurements. 

Purpose 
The Directors believe that these APMs provide additional useful information on the underlying 
performance and position of McColl’s. 

APMs are also used to enhance the comparability of information between reporting periods 
by adjusting for non-recurring or uncontrollable factors which affect IFRS measures, to aid the 
user in understanding McColl’s performance.

Consequently, APMs are used by the Directors and management for performance analysis, 
planning, reporting and incentive-setting purposes and have remained consistent with 
prior year. 

The key APMs that the Group has focused on this year are as follows: 

Like-for-like sales (LFL): This is a widely used indicator of a retailer’s current trading 
performance and is a measure of growth in sales from stores that have been open for at least 
a year. 

Sales from stores that have traded throughout the whole of the current and prior periods, and 
including VAT but excluding sales of fuel, lottery, mobile top-up, gift cards and travel tickets.

Adjusted EBITDA excluding property-related items: This profit measure shows the Group’s 
Earnings Before Interest, Tax, Depreciation and Amortisation adjusted for both Property gains 
and losses and other adjusting items. 

Property gains and losses: are incomes and costs that arise from events and transactions in 
relation to the Groups property and not from the principal activity of the Group, i.e. that of an 
operator of convenience and newsagent stores. 

Adjusting items: relate to costs or incomes that derive from events or transactions that 
fall within the normal activities of the Group but which, individually or, if of a similar type, in 
aggregate, are excluded from the Group’s adjusted profit measures due to their size and 
nature in order to reflect management’s view of the performance of the Group. 

Adjusted Operating Profit: Operating Profit before the impact of adjusting items as 
explained above. 

Adjusted Earnings per share: Earnings per share before the impact of adjusting items.

APM 

Income statement 
Revenue measures

Closest equivalent  
IFRS measure 

Note reference  
for reconciliation

Definition and purpose

Sales growth 

No direct equivalent 

Not applicable 

Growth in sales is a ratio that measures year-on-year movement in Group sales for continuing operations for 
52 weeks. It shows the annual rate of increase in the Group’s sales and is considered a good indicator of how 
rapidly the Group’s core business is growing. 

Sales mix

No direct equivalent

Not applicable

The relative proportion or ratio of products sold compared to the same period in the prior year.

Like-for-like (LFL)

No direct equivalent 

Not applicable 

Profit measures
Adjusted operating profit 
excluding property-related 
items

Operating profit

Note 6

Like-for-like is a measure of growth in Group sales from stores that have been open for at least a year (but 
excludes prior year sales of stores closed during the year). It is a widely used indicator of a retailer’s current 
trading performance and is important when comparing growth between retailers that have different profiles 
of expansion, disposals and closures. 

Operating profit before adjusting items is the headline measure of the Group’s performance. It is based on 
operating profit before the impact of certain costs or incomes, including property-related items, that derive 
from events or transactions that fall within the normal activities of the Group, but which are excluded by virtue 
of their size and nature in order to reflect management’s view of the performance of the Group. This is a key 
management incentive metric.

135

Glossary of terms continued

APM 

Gross margin 

Closest equivalent  
IFRS measure 

Note reference  
for reconciliation

No direct equivalent

Not applicable

Profits/(losses) arising on 
property-related items 

No direct equivalent

Not applicable

Adjusted net finance costs 

Finance costs

Note 8

Adjusted EBITDA

No direct equivalent

Note 6

No direct equivalent

Note 11

Basic adjusted Earnings  
per share (EPS)

Diluted adjusted  
earnings per share 

Balance sheet measures
Net debt 

Definition and purpose

Gross margin is calculated as gross profit before adjusting items divided by revenue. Progression in gross margin is 
an important indicator of the Group’s operating efficiency. 

Profits/(losses) arising on property-related items relates to the Group’s property activities including; gains and 
losses on disposal of property assets, sale and lease back of freehold interests; costs resulting from changes in the 
Group’s store portfolio and income/(charges) associated with impairment of non-trading property and related 
onerous contracts. These items are disclosed separately to clearly identify the impact of these items versus the 
other operating expenses related to the core retail operations of the business. They can be one-time in nature 
and can have a disproportionate impact on profit between reporting periods.

Total finance costs before adjusting items is the net finance costs adjusted for non-recurring one-off items due to 
their size and nature.

This profit measure shows the Group’s Earnings Before Interest, Tax, Depreciation and Amortisation adjusted for 
both Property gains and losses and other adjusting items, in order to provide shareholders with a measure of true 
underlying performance of the business.

This relates to profit after tax before adjusting items divided by the basic weighted average number of shares, in 
order to provide shareholders with a measure of true underlying performance of the business.

Diluted earnings per share

Note 11

The difference between basic and diluted metric is the impact of the dilutive effect of share options in existence.

Borrowings less cash and 
related hedges 

Note 24 

Net debt comprises bank and other borrowings, finance lease payables, and net interest receivables/payables, 
offset by cash and cash equivalents and short-term investments. It is a useful measure of the progress in 
generating cash and strengthening of the Group’s balance sheet position and is a measure widely used by 
credit rating agencies. 

Other
Capital expenditure, excluding the acquisition: The additions to property, plant and equipment and intangible assets that do not relate to the acquisition of, or further investment in, the 
298 stores acquired from the Co-op.

Capital expenditure (Capex): The additions to property, plant and equipment and intangible assets.

FTE: Full-time equivalents. 

RPI: Retail Price Index. 

CPI: Consumer Price Index. 

LPI: Limited Price Inflation.

Total Shareholder Return (TSR): The notional annualised return from a share, measured as the percentage change in the share price, plus the dividends paid with the gross dividends, 
reinvested in McColl’s shares. This is measured over both a one and three year period.

Grocery sales: This includes ambient, fresh, frozen and household groceries, and food-to-go, but excludes impulse categories (including confectionery, crisps and snacks, soft drinks and ice 
cream), general merchandise, news and magazines, and services.

136  McColl’s Retail Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2017

Contacts, addresses and shareholder information

Contacts and 
addresses

Company registration number
08783477

Head office
McColl’s Retail Group plc 
McColl’s House 
Ashwells Road 
Brentwood 
Essex 
CM15 9ST 
Telephone: 01277 372916 
Email: investor.relations@mccolls.co.uk 
ISIN: GB00BJ3VW957

www.mccollsplc.co.uk/investor

Shareholder 
information

Corporate broker
Numis Securities Limited 
The London Stock Exchange Building 
10 Paternoster Square 
London EC4M 7LT

Legal advisors
Travers Smith LLP 
10 Snow Hill 
London EC1A 2AL

Independent auditor
Deloitte LLP 
2 New Street Square 
London EC4A 3BZ

Company Secretary
Bernadette Young 
McColl’s Retail Group plc 
McColl’s House 
Ashwells Road 
Brentwood 
Essex 
CM15 9ST

Registrar
Link Asset Services 
The Registry 
34 Beckenham Road 
Beckenham 
Kent 
BR3 4TU

Telephone – UK: 0871 664 0300  
from overseas, call +44 (0) 371 664 0300

Calls cost 12p per minute plus your phone company’s  
access charge. Calls outside the United Kingdom will be 
charged at the applicable international rate. We are open 
between 09.00 – 17.30, Monday to Friday excluding public 
holidays in England and Wales

By email: enquiries@linkgroup.co.uk

Web portal: www.signalshares.com

Designed and produced by Radley Yeldar

www.ry.com

Printed by Pureprint Group using their environmental 
print technology, a guaranteed, low carbon, low waste, 
independently audited process that reduces the 
environmental impact of the printing process.  
Pureprint Group is a CarbonNeutral® company and  
is certified to Environmental Management System,  
ISO 14001 and registered to EMAS, the Eco Management  
and Audit Scheme.

 
McColl’s Retail Group plc  
McColl’s House  
Ashwells Road  
Brentwood  
Essex  
CM15 9ST 

T: 01277 372916 

www.mccollsplc.co.uk